1 Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 Release Note CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 Catalog Numbers 1769-L20, 1769-L30 These release notes correspond to firmware revision 13.19. Use this firmware release with: These release notes provide this information: Product Compatible version RSLogix 5000 programming software 13.00 RSLinx software 2.42 RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software 4.21 RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP software 4.21 1769-SDN firmware 2.2 For Information About See This Section On This Page preliminary actions to take before you use this revision Before You Update Your System 2 new features for CompactLogix controllers Enhancements 2 changes to CompactLogix controllers Changes 6 restrictions that no longer apply to CompactLogix controllers Corrected Anomalies 8 restrictions for CompactLogix controllers Restrictions 12 using electronic data sheets Installing EDS Files 13 upgrading your CompactLogix with the most recent firmware Loading Controller Firmware 13 additional memory requirements to update to this revision Additional Memory Requirements 14 using the hold last state and safe state features with 1769 Compact I/O modules Hold Last State and User-defined Safe State Not Supported 15 making sure your CompactLogix controller has enough memory to support your system’s design (1) Verify I/O Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used 16 (1) You must verify backplane memory use to make sure that the controller can support the proposed system.
Transcript of CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13€¦ · Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October...
1 Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
Release Note
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Catalog Numbers 1769-L20 1769-L30
These release notes correspond to firmware revision 1319
Use this firmware release with
These release notes provide this information
Product Compatible version
RSLogix 5000 programming software 1300
RSLinx software 242
RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software 421
RSNetWorx for EtherNetIP software 421
1769-SDN firmware 22
For Information About See This Section On This Page
preliminary actions to take before you use this revision Before You Update Your System 2
new features for CompactLogix controllers Enhancements 2
changes to CompactLogix controllers Changes 6
restrictions that no longer apply to CompactLogix controllers Corrected Anomalies 8
restrictions for CompactLogix controllers Restrictions 12
using electronic data sheets Installing EDS Files 13
upgrading your CompactLogix with the most recent firmware Loading Controller Firmware 13
additional memory requirements to update to this revision Additional Memory Requirements 14
using the hold last state and safe state features with 1769 Compact IO modules
Hold Last State and User-defined Safe State Not Supported
15
making sure your CompactLogix controller has enough memory to support your systemrsquos design(1)
Verify IO Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used
16
(1) You must verify backplane memory use to make sure that the controller can support the proposed system
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
2 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Before You Update Your System
Before you update your controller or RSLogix 5000 software to this revision do the following preliminary actions
Enhancements This revision of CompactLogix controllers supports the enhancements described in Table 1
If Then
Your controller is connected to a DH-485 network
We recommend that you use DH-485 communications as follows
If you update the firmware of a controller while the controller is connected to a DH-485 network communication on the network may stop To prevent this disconnect the controller from the DH-485 network before you update the firmware of the controller
Logix5000 controllers should be used on DH-485 networks only when you wish to add these controllers to an existing DH-485 network For new applications with Logix5000 controllers DeviceNet Ethernet and ControlNet are the recommended networks
Table 1 Enhancements
Enhancement Description
Consumed Tag Trigger for Event Tasks An event task performs a function only when a specific event (trigger) occurs Whenever the trigger for the event task occurs the event task
interrupts any lower priority tasks
executes one time
returns control to where the previous task left off
With the firmware revisions in this publication the CompactLogix controller event task trigger can be
consumed tag
EVENT instruction (also available with FW 12x)
Online Edits of Sequential Function Charts (SFC) and Structured Text (ST)
This revision lets you perform online editing of Sequential Function Chart (SFC) and Structured Text (ST) routines
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 3
Finalize All Edits in a program The Finalize All Edits in Program option lets you make an online change to your logic without testing the change
When you choose Finalize All Edits in Program
All edits in the program (pending and test) immediately download to the controller and begin execution
The original logic is permanently removed from the controller
Outputs that were in the original logic stay in their last state unless executed by the new logic (or other logic)
If your edits include an SFC the SFC resets to the initial step and stored actions turn off
Motion Calculate Slave Value (MCSV) instruction
Use the MCSV instruction in the following applications
Position cam electronic camming between two axes according to a specified cam profile
Time cam electronic camming of an axis as a function of time according to a specified cam profile
The MCSV instruction returns the slave value within a specified cam profile for a given master value The master value can be master position or time Use that information to re-synchronize motion after a fault or to calculate dynamic phase corrections
Table 1 Enhancements
Enhancement Description
Finalize All Edits in Program
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
4 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Estimate Memory Information Offline
View Memory Information Online
To estimate how much controller memory your project requires use the Memory tab of the controller properties dialog box For each of the memory areas of your controller the Memory tab lets you estimate number of bytes of
free (unused) memory
used memory
largest free contiguous block of memory
When online with a controller the Memory tab shows the actual memory usage of the controller The tab includes a Max Used entry for each type of memory The Max Used values show the peak of memory usage as communication occurs
Improved Performance of Simple Structured Text Statements
The controller now executes simple structured text (ST) assignments and comparisons faster than previous revisions
Table 1 Enhancements
Enhancement Description
For this This is simple This is not simple
assignment A= B A= -BA= B + CA= sin(B)
comparison (= lt lt= gt gt= ltgt) A gt BA = B
A gt -BA gt (B + C)A gt sin(B)
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 5
For some non-recoverable faults the controller produces a major fault and may be able to log diagnostic information
If the controller detects a non-recoverable fault that was not caused by the controllerrsquos hardware the controller now responds as follows
If the controller Then
has a CompactFlash socket
The controller clears the project from its memory and produces a major fault (flashing red OK LED)
has no CompactFlash socket
The controller initially shows a solid red OK LED After you cycle power the controller produces a major fault (flashing red OK LED)
In either case the controller still clears the project from memory The fault code that the controller displays depends on whether you have installed a CompactFlash card in the controller
In previous revisions
The controller would not go to faulted mode or display a fault code for the type of situation described above
Controllers with a CompactFlash socket showed a solid red OK LED
Table 1 Enhancements
Enhancement Description
Type Code Cause Recovery Method
1 60 For a controller with no CompactFlash card installed the controller
detected a non-recoverable fault
cleared the project from memory
1 Clear the fault2 Download the project3 Change to Remote RunRun
modeIf the problem persists
1 Before you cycle power to the controller record the state of the OK and RS232 LEDs
2 Contact Rockwell Automation support See the back of this publication
1 61 For a controller with a CompactFlash card installed the controller
detected a non-recoverable fault
wrote diagnostic information to the CompactFlash card
cleared the project from memory
1 Clear the fault2 Download the project3 Change to Remote RunRun
modeIf the problem persists contact Rockwell Automation support See the back of this publication
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
6 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Changes Changes are organized by firmware revision in which the change occurred
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1317
Table 2 Changes
Change DescriptionIn a Message (MSG) instruction you cannot set or clear certain status bits
Do not set or clear the following members of a Message (MSG) instruction
EW
ER
DN
ST
Flags
Important If your logic currently manipulates any of the above members of a MSG instruction your controller may operate differently when you update to this revision
If you set or clear one of those bits RSLogix 5000 software displays the change But the MSG instruction ignores the change and continues to execute based on the internally-stored value of those bits
Motion planner no longer waits for consumed data to start flowing
The motion planner now begins execution immediately regardless of whether or not the planner is receiving data via a consumed axis
In previous revisions a consumed axis caused the motion planner to delay its execution until data started flowing from the producing controller Under the following combination of circumstances the motion task of the controller failed to start at all
The system included 2 controllers in the same chassis
Each controller produced an axis for the other controller
For Function Block Instructions that use periodic timing DeltaT now includes the fractional portion of the taskrsquos period
If your function block instruction uses the periodic timing mode the controller no longer truncates the fractional portion of a taskrsquos period to produce the delta time (DeltaT)
In previous revisions the controller truncated the fractional portion of the taskrsquos period
While in Program mode a motion group fault no longer produces a major fault
As an option you can configure a motion group to produce a major fault any time the group detects a motion fault
With this revision a motion group that is configured to produce a major fault produces a major fault only if the controller is in RunRemote Run mode
In previous revisions the motion group could produce a major fault while the controller was in ProgramRemote Program mode For example a store to nonvolatile memory interrupts the execution of the motion planner which produces a fault
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 7
Out-of-range subscript no longer produces a fault during prescan
During prescan the controller automatically clears any faults due to an array subscript that is beyond the range of the array (out of range)
In previous revisions this produced a major fault
Autotune now uses a non-integrating process model for temperature processes
When you autotune an Enhanced PID (PIDE) function block with the Process Type = Temperature autotune now uses a non-integrating process model to estimate tuning constants This gives better tuning constants for most application
In previous revisions autotune used an integrating process model
You must place a label (LBL) instruction at the start of a rung
If your logic includes a Label (LBL) instruction make sure the instruction is the first instruction on the rung If the instruction is not the first move the LBL instruction to the beginning of the rung Otherwise the routine will not verify
In previous revisions RSLogix 5000 software let you place the LBL instruction elsewhere on the rung But the controller always executed the instruction as if it were at the beginning of the rung
Reduction in the prescan time of projects with many jump to subroutine (JSR) instructions
During a prescan the controller no longer prescans a routine more than once Once the controller prescans a routine it does not prescan the routine again during that prescan
In previous revisions the controller would prescan a routine as often as the routine was called in logic For projects with many calls to subroutines this could produce a very long prescan and cause a watchdog timeout fault
Table 2 Changes
Change Description
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
8 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Corrected Anomalies The corrected anomalies are organized by the firmware revision that corrected them
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1319
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1318
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1317
Table 3 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Controller Occasionally Failed to Load Program at Power-Up
When the controller was powered up occasionally it did not load its program An internal check in the power-up sequence erroneously caused the controller not to load the program
Lgx00053881
Table 4 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Subroutines Invoked from SFC Actions Were Not Properly Postscanned
A subroutine invoked from an SFC action was not properly postscanned when the SFC was configured for automatic reset Instructions and assignments may not have set their data to postscan values For example an Output Energize (OTE) instruction may not have cleared its data during postscan
Lgx00047935
In SFCs Configured for Auto Reset Stored Actions Were Not Properly Postscanned
When an SFC was configured for Automatic Reset and an Action used a stored qualifier (S SD SL DS) when a reset action (R) executed the action being reset was not postscanned
Lgx00047407
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
The controller did not support 32 consumed connections
Over EtherNetIP previous revisions of the CompactLogix controllers supported only 25 connections
The WallClockTime increased after power cycles
When the CompactLogix controllers had power cycled the controller wallclock time increased
The WallClockTime changed to an invalid value after restoring from CompactFlash at power up
If you use a CompactFlash card and have it set to ldquorestore on power uprdquo you may have needed to reset the wallclock time If maintaining an accurate wallclock time was crucial to your application you either had to disable the ldquorestore on power uprdquo feature or use a combination of GSV and SSV instructions to check the wallclock time and if necessary reset it to an accurate time
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 9
uni-directional homing failed to complete
A Motion Axis Home (MAH) instruction sometime failed to complete (IP bit remained on) under the following axis configuration
Return Speed = 0
uni-directional homing (forward or reverse)
unconditional MDR instruction did not re-execute
A Motion Disarm Registration (MDR) instruction failed to repeatedly execute under the following circumstances
You placed the MDR instruction in a structured text routine
You did not provide any conditions to control the execution of the instruction that is you programmed it to execute continuously)
In those circumstances the EN bit might have been left on after the first execution and the instruction no longer executed again
Important In structured text we recommend that you condition the instruction so that it only executes on a transition
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
10 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
blended moves produce smoother more accurate motion
This revision improves the response of the axes when you blend the execution of Motion Coordinated Linear Move (MCLM) and Motion Coordinated Circular Move (MCCM) instructions
large message (MSG) instructions might have caused a non-recoverable fault
The following configuration of a Message (MSG) instruction might have produced a non-recoverable fault
When the controller experiences a non-recoverable fault it clears the project from memory
during power up the controller erroneously showed a red IO LED
During power up the controller sometimes showed a flashing red IO LED when there was no problem
autotune produced unnecessary warnings
When you completed an autotune of an Enhanced PID (PIDE) function block instruction the Autotune Status field sometimes showed warning messages that were incorrect (did not apply)
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Termination Type0 = actual tolerance1 = no settle2 = command tolerance3 = no deceleration
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) axes change more smoothly and follow the intended path more closely
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) and the program path direction is reversed the instruction will exceed the specified accelerationdeceleration for the MCLM or MCCM instruction
Message type = CIP Data Table Read or Write
The instruction transferred gt 240 bytes
Communication was through the serial port
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 11
Known Anomalies The known anomalies are organized by the catalog number in which they are known to exist
Rampsoak (RMPS) instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode
On download a RampSoak (RMPS) Instruction now initializes to Operator Manual mode unless some other mode is requested
In previous revisions the instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode This lack of initialization could have caused the RMPS instruction to ignore the soak time for the first rampsoak segment
Remote output module momentarily dropped its connection
The following combination of circumstances occasionally caused an output module to drop its connection to the controller and then re-establish the connection
The module was in a remote chassis
The module used a Rack Optimization communication format
The controller also executed a Message (MSG) instruction that bridged across the backplane of that same remote chassis to another communication module
Occurred most frequently if the MSG instruction was not cached
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Table 6 Known Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Using RPI = 1ms with 1769-L20 and 1769-L30 controllers causes a fault on the Virtual Adapter
The RPI range for the CompactLogix Virtual Adapter was changed to allow settings from 1 ms - 750 ms for all CompactLogix controller types Currently the only CompactLogix controllers that support a 1 ms RPI are the 1769-L31 1769-L32E 1769-L35E controllers The 1769-L20 1769-L30 controllers support a 2 ms minimum RPI
You can configure a 1769-L20 1769-L30 controller project for 1 ms RPI since this appears as a valid range for the controller and you can download the project without error but the Virtual Adapter will be faulted The fault indicated on the Virtual Adapter Connection tab is ldquoRequested Packet Interval (RPI) out of rangerdquo The software indicates the setting is valid but the controller rejects the RPI because it is invalid
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
12 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Restrictions The restrictions are organized by the catalog number
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30
Table 7 Restrictions
Restriction DescriptionIn a tag of a user-defined data type an instruction may write past the end of an array
If you write too much data to an array that is within a user-defined data type some instructions write beyond the array and into other members of the tag
The following instructions write beyond the array into other members of the tag
This restriction also applies to all previous revisionsTo prevent writing beyond the limits of the destination array make sure the length operand of the instruction is less than or equal to the number of elements in the array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
hellipthe instruction stops at the end of the array
Example 1 Instruction Stops at the End of the Array
hellipthe instruction writes data beyond the end of the array into other members of the tag Regardless of the length specified for the instruction it stops writing if it reaches the end of the tag
Example 2 Instruction Writes Beyond the Array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
BSL
BSR
COP
CPS
DDT
FBC
FFL
FFU
FLL
GSV
LFL
LFU
SQL
SRT
SSV
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 13
Installing EDS Files If you have RSLinx software version 242 or greater the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an older version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files You need EDS files for
appropriate controller
1769 CompactBus
1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the EDS files that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware
To update the controller firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file 0001000E00410100eds installed
The EDS files are available on the CD for RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software version 13 The files are also available at
httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Loading Controller Firmware
The controller is shipped without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller The firmware for all CompactLogix controllers is available on the website and on the RSLogix 5000 CD To load firmware you can use
ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
AutoFlash that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
See the controller installation instructions for more information about using these utilities to load firmware
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
14 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Additional Memory Requirements
Revision 130 or later may require more memory than previous revisions for example 10x 11x To estimate the additional memory that your project may require use Table 8
Table 8
If you have this firmware revision (add all that apply)
Then add the following memory requirements to your project
Component Increase per instance
12x or earlier IO module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 90 bytes
IO module with a comm format = something other than Rack Optimization that is direct connection
144 bytes
CompactLogix 1769 IO module 170 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = None 160 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 220 bytes
11x or earlier tag that uses the MOTION_INSTRUCTION data type 4 bytes
tag for an axis
If the data type is And the tag is
AXIS_VIRTUAL produced for another controller 264 bytes
not produced for another controller 264 bytes
output cam execution targets 648 bytes
user-defined data type
number of user-defined data types in the controller organizer Data Types folder User-defined folder
not the use of that data type in tags
128 bytes
indirect address (using a tag as the subscript for an array in an instruction for example Array_A[Tag_B]) This memory change applies only if the array
uses a structure as its data type does not use one of these data types CONTROL COUNTER PID
or TIMER
has only one dimension for example UDT_1[5]
(-60 bytes)
10x or earlier programs 12 bytes
routines 16 bytes
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 15
Hold Last State and User-defined Safe State Not Supported
When 1769 Compact IO modules are used as local IO modules in a CompactLogix system the local IO modules do not support the Hold Last State or User-defined Safe State features even though you can configure these options in the programming software
If a local IO module fails such that the modulersquos communication to the controller is lost or if any module is disconnected from the system bus while under power the controller will go into the fault mode All outputs turn off when the system bus or any module faults
RSLogix 5000 software creates tags for modules when you add them to the IO configuration The 1769 module tags define configuration (C) data type members that may include attributes for alternate outputs CompactLogix does not enable local modules to use the alternate outputs Do not configure the attributes listed below
Any 1769 Compact IO modules used as remote IO modules in a CompactLogix system do support the Hold Last State and User-Defined Safe State features
For Digital Output Modules For Analog Output Modules
ProgToFaultEn
ProgMode
ProgValue
FaultMode
FaultValue
CHxProgToFaultEn
CHxProgMode
CHxFaultMode
where CHx = the channel number
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
16 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Verify IO Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used
Each module in a CompactLogix system uses a set amount of backplane memory in addition to the data that the module stores or transfers Some modules require a considerable amount of backplane memory Take this into account when designing your system because backplane memory usage affects how many modules a controller can support Each CompactLogix controller supports 256 16-bit words of backplane data Table 9 shows how many backplane words each module uses
(35 words input34 words output118 words configuration)
1769-SDN 76plus total words in scanlist
system overhead (per controller)
34 34
Total Words Required(1)
(1) The total words required cannot exceed 256 words
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 17
Compact IO CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx and RSLogix 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
2 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Before You Update Your System
Before you update your controller or RSLogix 5000 software to this revision do the following preliminary actions
Enhancements This revision of CompactLogix controllers supports the enhancements described in Table 1
If Then
Your controller is connected to a DH-485 network
We recommend that you use DH-485 communications as follows
If you update the firmware of a controller while the controller is connected to a DH-485 network communication on the network may stop To prevent this disconnect the controller from the DH-485 network before you update the firmware of the controller
Logix5000 controllers should be used on DH-485 networks only when you wish to add these controllers to an existing DH-485 network For new applications with Logix5000 controllers DeviceNet Ethernet and ControlNet are the recommended networks
Table 1 Enhancements
Enhancement Description
Consumed Tag Trigger for Event Tasks An event task performs a function only when a specific event (trigger) occurs Whenever the trigger for the event task occurs the event task
interrupts any lower priority tasks
executes one time
returns control to where the previous task left off
With the firmware revisions in this publication the CompactLogix controller event task trigger can be
consumed tag
EVENT instruction (also available with FW 12x)
Online Edits of Sequential Function Charts (SFC) and Structured Text (ST)
This revision lets you perform online editing of Sequential Function Chart (SFC) and Structured Text (ST) routines
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 3
Finalize All Edits in a program The Finalize All Edits in Program option lets you make an online change to your logic without testing the change
When you choose Finalize All Edits in Program
All edits in the program (pending and test) immediately download to the controller and begin execution
The original logic is permanently removed from the controller
Outputs that were in the original logic stay in their last state unless executed by the new logic (or other logic)
If your edits include an SFC the SFC resets to the initial step and stored actions turn off
Motion Calculate Slave Value (MCSV) instruction
Use the MCSV instruction in the following applications
Position cam electronic camming between two axes according to a specified cam profile
Time cam electronic camming of an axis as a function of time according to a specified cam profile
The MCSV instruction returns the slave value within a specified cam profile for a given master value The master value can be master position or time Use that information to re-synchronize motion after a fault or to calculate dynamic phase corrections
Table 1 Enhancements
Enhancement Description
Finalize All Edits in Program
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
4 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Estimate Memory Information Offline
View Memory Information Online
To estimate how much controller memory your project requires use the Memory tab of the controller properties dialog box For each of the memory areas of your controller the Memory tab lets you estimate number of bytes of
free (unused) memory
used memory
largest free contiguous block of memory
When online with a controller the Memory tab shows the actual memory usage of the controller The tab includes a Max Used entry for each type of memory The Max Used values show the peak of memory usage as communication occurs
Improved Performance of Simple Structured Text Statements
The controller now executes simple structured text (ST) assignments and comparisons faster than previous revisions
Table 1 Enhancements
Enhancement Description
For this This is simple This is not simple
assignment A= B A= -BA= B + CA= sin(B)
comparison (= lt lt= gt gt= ltgt) A gt BA = B
A gt -BA gt (B + C)A gt sin(B)
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 5
For some non-recoverable faults the controller produces a major fault and may be able to log diagnostic information
If the controller detects a non-recoverable fault that was not caused by the controllerrsquos hardware the controller now responds as follows
If the controller Then
has a CompactFlash socket
The controller clears the project from its memory and produces a major fault (flashing red OK LED)
has no CompactFlash socket
The controller initially shows a solid red OK LED After you cycle power the controller produces a major fault (flashing red OK LED)
In either case the controller still clears the project from memory The fault code that the controller displays depends on whether you have installed a CompactFlash card in the controller
In previous revisions
The controller would not go to faulted mode or display a fault code for the type of situation described above
Controllers with a CompactFlash socket showed a solid red OK LED
Table 1 Enhancements
Enhancement Description
Type Code Cause Recovery Method
1 60 For a controller with no CompactFlash card installed the controller
detected a non-recoverable fault
cleared the project from memory
1 Clear the fault2 Download the project3 Change to Remote RunRun
modeIf the problem persists
1 Before you cycle power to the controller record the state of the OK and RS232 LEDs
2 Contact Rockwell Automation support See the back of this publication
1 61 For a controller with a CompactFlash card installed the controller
detected a non-recoverable fault
wrote diagnostic information to the CompactFlash card
cleared the project from memory
1 Clear the fault2 Download the project3 Change to Remote RunRun
modeIf the problem persists contact Rockwell Automation support See the back of this publication
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
6 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Changes Changes are organized by firmware revision in which the change occurred
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1317
Table 2 Changes
Change DescriptionIn a Message (MSG) instruction you cannot set or clear certain status bits
Do not set or clear the following members of a Message (MSG) instruction
EW
ER
DN
ST
Flags
Important If your logic currently manipulates any of the above members of a MSG instruction your controller may operate differently when you update to this revision
If you set or clear one of those bits RSLogix 5000 software displays the change But the MSG instruction ignores the change and continues to execute based on the internally-stored value of those bits
Motion planner no longer waits for consumed data to start flowing
The motion planner now begins execution immediately regardless of whether or not the planner is receiving data via a consumed axis
In previous revisions a consumed axis caused the motion planner to delay its execution until data started flowing from the producing controller Under the following combination of circumstances the motion task of the controller failed to start at all
The system included 2 controllers in the same chassis
Each controller produced an axis for the other controller
For Function Block Instructions that use periodic timing DeltaT now includes the fractional portion of the taskrsquos period
If your function block instruction uses the periodic timing mode the controller no longer truncates the fractional portion of a taskrsquos period to produce the delta time (DeltaT)
In previous revisions the controller truncated the fractional portion of the taskrsquos period
While in Program mode a motion group fault no longer produces a major fault
As an option you can configure a motion group to produce a major fault any time the group detects a motion fault
With this revision a motion group that is configured to produce a major fault produces a major fault only if the controller is in RunRemote Run mode
In previous revisions the motion group could produce a major fault while the controller was in ProgramRemote Program mode For example a store to nonvolatile memory interrupts the execution of the motion planner which produces a fault
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 7
Out-of-range subscript no longer produces a fault during prescan
During prescan the controller automatically clears any faults due to an array subscript that is beyond the range of the array (out of range)
In previous revisions this produced a major fault
Autotune now uses a non-integrating process model for temperature processes
When you autotune an Enhanced PID (PIDE) function block with the Process Type = Temperature autotune now uses a non-integrating process model to estimate tuning constants This gives better tuning constants for most application
In previous revisions autotune used an integrating process model
You must place a label (LBL) instruction at the start of a rung
If your logic includes a Label (LBL) instruction make sure the instruction is the first instruction on the rung If the instruction is not the first move the LBL instruction to the beginning of the rung Otherwise the routine will not verify
In previous revisions RSLogix 5000 software let you place the LBL instruction elsewhere on the rung But the controller always executed the instruction as if it were at the beginning of the rung
Reduction in the prescan time of projects with many jump to subroutine (JSR) instructions
During a prescan the controller no longer prescans a routine more than once Once the controller prescans a routine it does not prescan the routine again during that prescan
In previous revisions the controller would prescan a routine as often as the routine was called in logic For projects with many calls to subroutines this could produce a very long prescan and cause a watchdog timeout fault
Table 2 Changes
Change Description
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
8 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Corrected Anomalies The corrected anomalies are organized by the firmware revision that corrected them
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1319
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1318
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1317
Table 3 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Controller Occasionally Failed to Load Program at Power-Up
When the controller was powered up occasionally it did not load its program An internal check in the power-up sequence erroneously caused the controller not to load the program
Lgx00053881
Table 4 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Subroutines Invoked from SFC Actions Were Not Properly Postscanned
A subroutine invoked from an SFC action was not properly postscanned when the SFC was configured for automatic reset Instructions and assignments may not have set their data to postscan values For example an Output Energize (OTE) instruction may not have cleared its data during postscan
Lgx00047935
In SFCs Configured for Auto Reset Stored Actions Were Not Properly Postscanned
When an SFC was configured for Automatic Reset and an Action used a stored qualifier (S SD SL DS) when a reset action (R) executed the action being reset was not postscanned
Lgx00047407
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
The controller did not support 32 consumed connections
Over EtherNetIP previous revisions of the CompactLogix controllers supported only 25 connections
The WallClockTime increased after power cycles
When the CompactLogix controllers had power cycled the controller wallclock time increased
The WallClockTime changed to an invalid value after restoring from CompactFlash at power up
If you use a CompactFlash card and have it set to ldquorestore on power uprdquo you may have needed to reset the wallclock time If maintaining an accurate wallclock time was crucial to your application you either had to disable the ldquorestore on power uprdquo feature or use a combination of GSV and SSV instructions to check the wallclock time and if necessary reset it to an accurate time
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 9
uni-directional homing failed to complete
A Motion Axis Home (MAH) instruction sometime failed to complete (IP bit remained on) under the following axis configuration
Return Speed = 0
uni-directional homing (forward or reverse)
unconditional MDR instruction did not re-execute
A Motion Disarm Registration (MDR) instruction failed to repeatedly execute under the following circumstances
You placed the MDR instruction in a structured text routine
You did not provide any conditions to control the execution of the instruction that is you programmed it to execute continuously)
In those circumstances the EN bit might have been left on after the first execution and the instruction no longer executed again
Important In structured text we recommend that you condition the instruction so that it only executes on a transition
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
10 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
blended moves produce smoother more accurate motion
This revision improves the response of the axes when you blend the execution of Motion Coordinated Linear Move (MCLM) and Motion Coordinated Circular Move (MCCM) instructions
large message (MSG) instructions might have caused a non-recoverable fault
The following configuration of a Message (MSG) instruction might have produced a non-recoverable fault
When the controller experiences a non-recoverable fault it clears the project from memory
during power up the controller erroneously showed a red IO LED
During power up the controller sometimes showed a flashing red IO LED when there was no problem
autotune produced unnecessary warnings
When you completed an autotune of an Enhanced PID (PIDE) function block instruction the Autotune Status field sometimes showed warning messages that were incorrect (did not apply)
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Termination Type0 = actual tolerance1 = no settle2 = command tolerance3 = no deceleration
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) axes change more smoothly and follow the intended path more closely
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) and the program path direction is reversed the instruction will exceed the specified accelerationdeceleration for the MCLM or MCCM instruction
Message type = CIP Data Table Read or Write
The instruction transferred gt 240 bytes
Communication was through the serial port
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 11
Known Anomalies The known anomalies are organized by the catalog number in which they are known to exist
Rampsoak (RMPS) instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode
On download a RampSoak (RMPS) Instruction now initializes to Operator Manual mode unless some other mode is requested
In previous revisions the instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode This lack of initialization could have caused the RMPS instruction to ignore the soak time for the first rampsoak segment
Remote output module momentarily dropped its connection
The following combination of circumstances occasionally caused an output module to drop its connection to the controller and then re-establish the connection
The module was in a remote chassis
The module used a Rack Optimization communication format
The controller also executed a Message (MSG) instruction that bridged across the backplane of that same remote chassis to another communication module
Occurred most frequently if the MSG instruction was not cached
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Table 6 Known Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Using RPI = 1ms with 1769-L20 and 1769-L30 controllers causes a fault on the Virtual Adapter
The RPI range for the CompactLogix Virtual Adapter was changed to allow settings from 1 ms - 750 ms for all CompactLogix controller types Currently the only CompactLogix controllers that support a 1 ms RPI are the 1769-L31 1769-L32E 1769-L35E controllers The 1769-L20 1769-L30 controllers support a 2 ms minimum RPI
You can configure a 1769-L20 1769-L30 controller project for 1 ms RPI since this appears as a valid range for the controller and you can download the project without error but the Virtual Adapter will be faulted The fault indicated on the Virtual Adapter Connection tab is ldquoRequested Packet Interval (RPI) out of rangerdquo The software indicates the setting is valid but the controller rejects the RPI because it is invalid
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
12 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Restrictions The restrictions are organized by the catalog number
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30
Table 7 Restrictions
Restriction DescriptionIn a tag of a user-defined data type an instruction may write past the end of an array
If you write too much data to an array that is within a user-defined data type some instructions write beyond the array and into other members of the tag
The following instructions write beyond the array into other members of the tag
This restriction also applies to all previous revisionsTo prevent writing beyond the limits of the destination array make sure the length operand of the instruction is less than or equal to the number of elements in the array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
hellipthe instruction stops at the end of the array
Example 1 Instruction Stops at the End of the Array
hellipthe instruction writes data beyond the end of the array into other members of the tag Regardless of the length specified for the instruction it stops writing if it reaches the end of the tag
Example 2 Instruction Writes Beyond the Array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
BSL
BSR
COP
CPS
DDT
FBC
FFL
FFU
FLL
GSV
LFL
LFU
SQL
SRT
SSV
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 13
Installing EDS Files If you have RSLinx software version 242 or greater the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an older version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files You need EDS files for
appropriate controller
1769 CompactBus
1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the EDS files that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware
To update the controller firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file 0001000E00410100eds installed
The EDS files are available on the CD for RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software version 13 The files are also available at
httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Loading Controller Firmware
The controller is shipped without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller The firmware for all CompactLogix controllers is available on the website and on the RSLogix 5000 CD To load firmware you can use
ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
AutoFlash that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
See the controller installation instructions for more information about using these utilities to load firmware
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
14 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Additional Memory Requirements
Revision 130 or later may require more memory than previous revisions for example 10x 11x To estimate the additional memory that your project may require use Table 8
Table 8
If you have this firmware revision (add all that apply)
Then add the following memory requirements to your project
Component Increase per instance
12x or earlier IO module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 90 bytes
IO module with a comm format = something other than Rack Optimization that is direct connection
144 bytes
CompactLogix 1769 IO module 170 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = None 160 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 220 bytes
11x or earlier tag that uses the MOTION_INSTRUCTION data type 4 bytes
tag for an axis
If the data type is And the tag is
AXIS_VIRTUAL produced for another controller 264 bytes
not produced for another controller 264 bytes
output cam execution targets 648 bytes
user-defined data type
number of user-defined data types in the controller organizer Data Types folder User-defined folder
not the use of that data type in tags
128 bytes
indirect address (using a tag as the subscript for an array in an instruction for example Array_A[Tag_B]) This memory change applies only if the array
uses a structure as its data type does not use one of these data types CONTROL COUNTER PID
or TIMER
has only one dimension for example UDT_1[5]
(-60 bytes)
10x or earlier programs 12 bytes
routines 16 bytes
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 15
Hold Last State and User-defined Safe State Not Supported
When 1769 Compact IO modules are used as local IO modules in a CompactLogix system the local IO modules do not support the Hold Last State or User-defined Safe State features even though you can configure these options in the programming software
If a local IO module fails such that the modulersquos communication to the controller is lost or if any module is disconnected from the system bus while under power the controller will go into the fault mode All outputs turn off when the system bus or any module faults
RSLogix 5000 software creates tags for modules when you add them to the IO configuration The 1769 module tags define configuration (C) data type members that may include attributes for alternate outputs CompactLogix does not enable local modules to use the alternate outputs Do not configure the attributes listed below
Any 1769 Compact IO modules used as remote IO modules in a CompactLogix system do support the Hold Last State and User-Defined Safe State features
For Digital Output Modules For Analog Output Modules
ProgToFaultEn
ProgMode
ProgValue
FaultMode
FaultValue
CHxProgToFaultEn
CHxProgMode
CHxFaultMode
where CHx = the channel number
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
16 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Verify IO Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used
Each module in a CompactLogix system uses a set amount of backplane memory in addition to the data that the module stores or transfers Some modules require a considerable amount of backplane memory Take this into account when designing your system because backplane memory usage affects how many modules a controller can support Each CompactLogix controller supports 256 16-bit words of backplane data Table 9 shows how many backplane words each module uses
(35 words input34 words output118 words configuration)
1769-SDN 76plus total words in scanlist
system overhead (per controller)
34 34
Total Words Required(1)
(1) The total words required cannot exceed 256 words
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 17
Compact IO CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx and RSLogix 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 3
Finalize All Edits in a program The Finalize All Edits in Program option lets you make an online change to your logic without testing the change
When you choose Finalize All Edits in Program
All edits in the program (pending and test) immediately download to the controller and begin execution
The original logic is permanently removed from the controller
Outputs that were in the original logic stay in their last state unless executed by the new logic (or other logic)
If your edits include an SFC the SFC resets to the initial step and stored actions turn off
Motion Calculate Slave Value (MCSV) instruction
Use the MCSV instruction in the following applications
Position cam electronic camming between two axes according to a specified cam profile
Time cam electronic camming of an axis as a function of time according to a specified cam profile
The MCSV instruction returns the slave value within a specified cam profile for a given master value The master value can be master position or time Use that information to re-synchronize motion after a fault or to calculate dynamic phase corrections
Table 1 Enhancements
Enhancement Description
Finalize All Edits in Program
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
4 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Estimate Memory Information Offline
View Memory Information Online
To estimate how much controller memory your project requires use the Memory tab of the controller properties dialog box For each of the memory areas of your controller the Memory tab lets you estimate number of bytes of
free (unused) memory
used memory
largest free contiguous block of memory
When online with a controller the Memory tab shows the actual memory usage of the controller The tab includes a Max Used entry for each type of memory The Max Used values show the peak of memory usage as communication occurs
Improved Performance of Simple Structured Text Statements
The controller now executes simple structured text (ST) assignments and comparisons faster than previous revisions
Table 1 Enhancements
Enhancement Description
For this This is simple This is not simple
assignment A= B A= -BA= B + CA= sin(B)
comparison (= lt lt= gt gt= ltgt) A gt BA = B
A gt -BA gt (B + C)A gt sin(B)
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 5
For some non-recoverable faults the controller produces a major fault and may be able to log diagnostic information
If the controller detects a non-recoverable fault that was not caused by the controllerrsquos hardware the controller now responds as follows
If the controller Then
has a CompactFlash socket
The controller clears the project from its memory and produces a major fault (flashing red OK LED)
has no CompactFlash socket
The controller initially shows a solid red OK LED After you cycle power the controller produces a major fault (flashing red OK LED)
In either case the controller still clears the project from memory The fault code that the controller displays depends on whether you have installed a CompactFlash card in the controller
In previous revisions
The controller would not go to faulted mode or display a fault code for the type of situation described above
Controllers with a CompactFlash socket showed a solid red OK LED
Table 1 Enhancements
Enhancement Description
Type Code Cause Recovery Method
1 60 For a controller with no CompactFlash card installed the controller
detected a non-recoverable fault
cleared the project from memory
1 Clear the fault2 Download the project3 Change to Remote RunRun
modeIf the problem persists
1 Before you cycle power to the controller record the state of the OK and RS232 LEDs
2 Contact Rockwell Automation support See the back of this publication
1 61 For a controller with a CompactFlash card installed the controller
detected a non-recoverable fault
wrote diagnostic information to the CompactFlash card
cleared the project from memory
1 Clear the fault2 Download the project3 Change to Remote RunRun
modeIf the problem persists contact Rockwell Automation support See the back of this publication
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
6 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Changes Changes are organized by firmware revision in which the change occurred
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1317
Table 2 Changes
Change DescriptionIn a Message (MSG) instruction you cannot set or clear certain status bits
Do not set or clear the following members of a Message (MSG) instruction
EW
ER
DN
ST
Flags
Important If your logic currently manipulates any of the above members of a MSG instruction your controller may operate differently when you update to this revision
If you set or clear one of those bits RSLogix 5000 software displays the change But the MSG instruction ignores the change and continues to execute based on the internally-stored value of those bits
Motion planner no longer waits for consumed data to start flowing
The motion planner now begins execution immediately regardless of whether or not the planner is receiving data via a consumed axis
In previous revisions a consumed axis caused the motion planner to delay its execution until data started flowing from the producing controller Under the following combination of circumstances the motion task of the controller failed to start at all
The system included 2 controllers in the same chassis
Each controller produced an axis for the other controller
For Function Block Instructions that use periodic timing DeltaT now includes the fractional portion of the taskrsquos period
If your function block instruction uses the periodic timing mode the controller no longer truncates the fractional portion of a taskrsquos period to produce the delta time (DeltaT)
In previous revisions the controller truncated the fractional portion of the taskrsquos period
While in Program mode a motion group fault no longer produces a major fault
As an option you can configure a motion group to produce a major fault any time the group detects a motion fault
With this revision a motion group that is configured to produce a major fault produces a major fault only if the controller is in RunRemote Run mode
In previous revisions the motion group could produce a major fault while the controller was in ProgramRemote Program mode For example a store to nonvolatile memory interrupts the execution of the motion planner which produces a fault
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 7
Out-of-range subscript no longer produces a fault during prescan
During prescan the controller automatically clears any faults due to an array subscript that is beyond the range of the array (out of range)
In previous revisions this produced a major fault
Autotune now uses a non-integrating process model for temperature processes
When you autotune an Enhanced PID (PIDE) function block with the Process Type = Temperature autotune now uses a non-integrating process model to estimate tuning constants This gives better tuning constants for most application
In previous revisions autotune used an integrating process model
You must place a label (LBL) instruction at the start of a rung
If your logic includes a Label (LBL) instruction make sure the instruction is the first instruction on the rung If the instruction is not the first move the LBL instruction to the beginning of the rung Otherwise the routine will not verify
In previous revisions RSLogix 5000 software let you place the LBL instruction elsewhere on the rung But the controller always executed the instruction as if it were at the beginning of the rung
Reduction in the prescan time of projects with many jump to subroutine (JSR) instructions
During a prescan the controller no longer prescans a routine more than once Once the controller prescans a routine it does not prescan the routine again during that prescan
In previous revisions the controller would prescan a routine as often as the routine was called in logic For projects with many calls to subroutines this could produce a very long prescan and cause a watchdog timeout fault
Table 2 Changes
Change Description
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
8 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Corrected Anomalies The corrected anomalies are organized by the firmware revision that corrected them
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1319
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1318
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1317
Table 3 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Controller Occasionally Failed to Load Program at Power-Up
When the controller was powered up occasionally it did not load its program An internal check in the power-up sequence erroneously caused the controller not to load the program
Lgx00053881
Table 4 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Subroutines Invoked from SFC Actions Were Not Properly Postscanned
A subroutine invoked from an SFC action was not properly postscanned when the SFC was configured for automatic reset Instructions and assignments may not have set their data to postscan values For example an Output Energize (OTE) instruction may not have cleared its data during postscan
Lgx00047935
In SFCs Configured for Auto Reset Stored Actions Were Not Properly Postscanned
When an SFC was configured for Automatic Reset and an Action used a stored qualifier (S SD SL DS) when a reset action (R) executed the action being reset was not postscanned
Lgx00047407
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
The controller did not support 32 consumed connections
Over EtherNetIP previous revisions of the CompactLogix controllers supported only 25 connections
The WallClockTime increased after power cycles
When the CompactLogix controllers had power cycled the controller wallclock time increased
The WallClockTime changed to an invalid value after restoring from CompactFlash at power up
If you use a CompactFlash card and have it set to ldquorestore on power uprdquo you may have needed to reset the wallclock time If maintaining an accurate wallclock time was crucial to your application you either had to disable the ldquorestore on power uprdquo feature or use a combination of GSV and SSV instructions to check the wallclock time and if necessary reset it to an accurate time
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 9
uni-directional homing failed to complete
A Motion Axis Home (MAH) instruction sometime failed to complete (IP bit remained on) under the following axis configuration
Return Speed = 0
uni-directional homing (forward or reverse)
unconditional MDR instruction did not re-execute
A Motion Disarm Registration (MDR) instruction failed to repeatedly execute under the following circumstances
You placed the MDR instruction in a structured text routine
You did not provide any conditions to control the execution of the instruction that is you programmed it to execute continuously)
In those circumstances the EN bit might have been left on after the first execution and the instruction no longer executed again
Important In structured text we recommend that you condition the instruction so that it only executes on a transition
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
10 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
blended moves produce smoother more accurate motion
This revision improves the response of the axes when you blend the execution of Motion Coordinated Linear Move (MCLM) and Motion Coordinated Circular Move (MCCM) instructions
large message (MSG) instructions might have caused a non-recoverable fault
The following configuration of a Message (MSG) instruction might have produced a non-recoverable fault
When the controller experiences a non-recoverable fault it clears the project from memory
during power up the controller erroneously showed a red IO LED
During power up the controller sometimes showed a flashing red IO LED when there was no problem
autotune produced unnecessary warnings
When you completed an autotune of an Enhanced PID (PIDE) function block instruction the Autotune Status field sometimes showed warning messages that were incorrect (did not apply)
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Termination Type0 = actual tolerance1 = no settle2 = command tolerance3 = no deceleration
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) axes change more smoothly and follow the intended path more closely
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) and the program path direction is reversed the instruction will exceed the specified accelerationdeceleration for the MCLM or MCCM instruction
Message type = CIP Data Table Read or Write
The instruction transferred gt 240 bytes
Communication was through the serial port
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 11
Known Anomalies The known anomalies are organized by the catalog number in which they are known to exist
Rampsoak (RMPS) instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode
On download a RampSoak (RMPS) Instruction now initializes to Operator Manual mode unless some other mode is requested
In previous revisions the instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode This lack of initialization could have caused the RMPS instruction to ignore the soak time for the first rampsoak segment
Remote output module momentarily dropped its connection
The following combination of circumstances occasionally caused an output module to drop its connection to the controller and then re-establish the connection
The module was in a remote chassis
The module used a Rack Optimization communication format
The controller also executed a Message (MSG) instruction that bridged across the backplane of that same remote chassis to another communication module
Occurred most frequently if the MSG instruction was not cached
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Table 6 Known Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Using RPI = 1ms with 1769-L20 and 1769-L30 controllers causes a fault on the Virtual Adapter
The RPI range for the CompactLogix Virtual Adapter was changed to allow settings from 1 ms - 750 ms for all CompactLogix controller types Currently the only CompactLogix controllers that support a 1 ms RPI are the 1769-L31 1769-L32E 1769-L35E controllers The 1769-L20 1769-L30 controllers support a 2 ms minimum RPI
You can configure a 1769-L20 1769-L30 controller project for 1 ms RPI since this appears as a valid range for the controller and you can download the project without error but the Virtual Adapter will be faulted The fault indicated on the Virtual Adapter Connection tab is ldquoRequested Packet Interval (RPI) out of rangerdquo The software indicates the setting is valid but the controller rejects the RPI because it is invalid
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
12 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Restrictions The restrictions are organized by the catalog number
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30
Table 7 Restrictions
Restriction DescriptionIn a tag of a user-defined data type an instruction may write past the end of an array
If you write too much data to an array that is within a user-defined data type some instructions write beyond the array and into other members of the tag
The following instructions write beyond the array into other members of the tag
This restriction also applies to all previous revisionsTo prevent writing beyond the limits of the destination array make sure the length operand of the instruction is less than or equal to the number of elements in the array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
hellipthe instruction stops at the end of the array
Example 1 Instruction Stops at the End of the Array
hellipthe instruction writes data beyond the end of the array into other members of the tag Regardless of the length specified for the instruction it stops writing if it reaches the end of the tag
Example 2 Instruction Writes Beyond the Array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
BSL
BSR
COP
CPS
DDT
FBC
FFL
FFU
FLL
GSV
LFL
LFU
SQL
SRT
SSV
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 13
Installing EDS Files If you have RSLinx software version 242 or greater the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an older version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files You need EDS files for
appropriate controller
1769 CompactBus
1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the EDS files that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware
To update the controller firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file 0001000E00410100eds installed
The EDS files are available on the CD for RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software version 13 The files are also available at
httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Loading Controller Firmware
The controller is shipped without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller The firmware for all CompactLogix controllers is available on the website and on the RSLogix 5000 CD To load firmware you can use
ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
AutoFlash that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
See the controller installation instructions for more information about using these utilities to load firmware
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
14 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Additional Memory Requirements
Revision 130 or later may require more memory than previous revisions for example 10x 11x To estimate the additional memory that your project may require use Table 8
Table 8
If you have this firmware revision (add all that apply)
Then add the following memory requirements to your project
Component Increase per instance
12x or earlier IO module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 90 bytes
IO module with a comm format = something other than Rack Optimization that is direct connection
144 bytes
CompactLogix 1769 IO module 170 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = None 160 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 220 bytes
11x or earlier tag that uses the MOTION_INSTRUCTION data type 4 bytes
tag for an axis
If the data type is And the tag is
AXIS_VIRTUAL produced for another controller 264 bytes
not produced for another controller 264 bytes
output cam execution targets 648 bytes
user-defined data type
number of user-defined data types in the controller organizer Data Types folder User-defined folder
not the use of that data type in tags
128 bytes
indirect address (using a tag as the subscript for an array in an instruction for example Array_A[Tag_B]) This memory change applies only if the array
uses a structure as its data type does not use one of these data types CONTROL COUNTER PID
or TIMER
has only one dimension for example UDT_1[5]
(-60 bytes)
10x or earlier programs 12 bytes
routines 16 bytes
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 15
Hold Last State and User-defined Safe State Not Supported
When 1769 Compact IO modules are used as local IO modules in a CompactLogix system the local IO modules do not support the Hold Last State or User-defined Safe State features even though you can configure these options in the programming software
If a local IO module fails such that the modulersquos communication to the controller is lost or if any module is disconnected from the system bus while under power the controller will go into the fault mode All outputs turn off when the system bus or any module faults
RSLogix 5000 software creates tags for modules when you add them to the IO configuration The 1769 module tags define configuration (C) data type members that may include attributes for alternate outputs CompactLogix does not enable local modules to use the alternate outputs Do not configure the attributes listed below
Any 1769 Compact IO modules used as remote IO modules in a CompactLogix system do support the Hold Last State and User-Defined Safe State features
For Digital Output Modules For Analog Output Modules
ProgToFaultEn
ProgMode
ProgValue
FaultMode
FaultValue
CHxProgToFaultEn
CHxProgMode
CHxFaultMode
where CHx = the channel number
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
16 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Verify IO Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used
Each module in a CompactLogix system uses a set amount of backplane memory in addition to the data that the module stores or transfers Some modules require a considerable amount of backplane memory Take this into account when designing your system because backplane memory usage affects how many modules a controller can support Each CompactLogix controller supports 256 16-bit words of backplane data Table 9 shows how many backplane words each module uses
(35 words input34 words output118 words configuration)
1769-SDN 76plus total words in scanlist
system overhead (per controller)
34 34
Total Words Required(1)
(1) The total words required cannot exceed 256 words
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 17
Compact IO CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx and RSLogix 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
4 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Estimate Memory Information Offline
View Memory Information Online
To estimate how much controller memory your project requires use the Memory tab of the controller properties dialog box For each of the memory areas of your controller the Memory tab lets you estimate number of bytes of
free (unused) memory
used memory
largest free contiguous block of memory
When online with a controller the Memory tab shows the actual memory usage of the controller The tab includes a Max Used entry for each type of memory The Max Used values show the peak of memory usage as communication occurs
Improved Performance of Simple Structured Text Statements
The controller now executes simple structured text (ST) assignments and comparisons faster than previous revisions
Table 1 Enhancements
Enhancement Description
For this This is simple This is not simple
assignment A= B A= -BA= B + CA= sin(B)
comparison (= lt lt= gt gt= ltgt) A gt BA = B
A gt -BA gt (B + C)A gt sin(B)
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 5
For some non-recoverable faults the controller produces a major fault and may be able to log diagnostic information
If the controller detects a non-recoverable fault that was not caused by the controllerrsquos hardware the controller now responds as follows
If the controller Then
has a CompactFlash socket
The controller clears the project from its memory and produces a major fault (flashing red OK LED)
has no CompactFlash socket
The controller initially shows a solid red OK LED After you cycle power the controller produces a major fault (flashing red OK LED)
In either case the controller still clears the project from memory The fault code that the controller displays depends on whether you have installed a CompactFlash card in the controller
In previous revisions
The controller would not go to faulted mode or display a fault code for the type of situation described above
Controllers with a CompactFlash socket showed a solid red OK LED
Table 1 Enhancements
Enhancement Description
Type Code Cause Recovery Method
1 60 For a controller with no CompactFlash card installed the controller
detected a non-recoverable fault
cleared the project from memory
1 Clear the fault2 Download the project3 Change to Remote RunRun
modeIf the problem persists
1 Before you cycle power to the controller record the state of the OK and RS232 LEDs
2 Contact Rockwell Automation support See the back of this publication
1 61 For a controller with a CompactFlash card installed the controller
detected a non-recoverable fault
wrote diagnostic information to the CompactFlash card
cleared the project from memory
1 Clear the fault2 Download the project3 Change to Remote RunRun
modeIf the problem persists contact Rockwell Automation support See the back of this publication
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
6 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Changes Changes are organized by firmware revision in which the change occurred
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1317
Table 2 Changes
Change DescriptionIn a Message (MSG) instruction you cannot set or clear certain status bits
Do not set or clear the following members of a Message (MSG) instruction
EW
ER
DN
ST
Flags
Important If your logic currently manipulates any of the above members of a MSG instruction your controller may operate differently when you update to this revision
If you set or clear one of those bits RSLogix 5000 software displays the change But the MSG instruction ignores the change and continues to execute based on the internally-stored value of those bits
Motion planner no longer waits for consumed data to start flowing
The motion planner now begins execution immediately regardless of whether or not the planner is receiving data via a consumed axis
In previous revisions a consumed axis caused the motion planner to delay its execution until data started flowing from the producing controller Under the following combination of circumstances the motion task of the controller failed to start at all
The system included 2 controllers in the same chassis
Each controller produced an axis for the other controller
For Function Block Instructions that use periodic timing DeltaT now includes the fractional portion of the taskrsquos period
If your function block instruction uses the periodic timing mode the controller no longer truncates the fractional portion of a taskrsquos period to produce the delta time (DeltaT)
In previous revisions the controller truncated the fractional portion of the taskrsquos period
While in Program mode a motion group fault no longer produces a major fault
As an option you can configure a motion group to produce a major fault any time the group detects a motion fault
With this revision a motion group that is configured to produce a major fault produces a major fault only if the controller is in RunRemote Run mode
In previous revisions the motion group could produce a major fault while the controller was in ProgramRemote Program mode For example a store to nonvolatile memory interrupts the execution of the motion planner which produces a fault
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 7
Out-of-range subscript no longer produces a fault during prescan
During prescan the controller automatically clears any faults due to an array subscript that is beyond the range of the array (out of range)
In previous revisions this produced a major fault
Autotune now uses a non-integrating process model for temperature processes
When you autotune an Enhanced PID (PIDE) function block with the Process Type = Temperature autotune now uses a non-integrating process model to estimate tuning constants This gives better tuning constants for most application
In previous revisions autotune used an integrating process model
You must place a label (LBL) instruction at the start of a rung
If your logic includes a Label (LBL) instruction make sure the instruction is the first instruction on the rung If the instruction is not the first move the LBL instruction to the beginning of the rung Otherwise the routine will not verify
In previous revisions RSLogix 5000 software let you place the LBL instruction elsewhere on the rung But the controller always executed the instruction as if it were at the beginning of the rung
Reduction in the prescan time of projects with many jump to subroutine (JSR) instructions
During a prescan the controller no longer prescans a routine more than once Once the controller prescans a routine it does not prescan the routine again during that prescan
In previous revisions the controller would prescan a routine as often as the routine was called in logic For projects with many calls to subroutines this could produce a very long prescan and cause a watchdog timeout fault
Table 2 Changes
Change Description
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
8 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Corrected Anomalies The corrected anomalies are organized by the firmware revision that corrected them
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1319
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1318
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1317
Table 3 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Controller Occasionally Failed to Load Program at Power-Up
When the controller was powered up occasionally it did not load its program An internal check in the power-up sequence erroneously caused the controller not to load the program
Lgx00053881
Table 4 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Subroutines Invoked from SFC Actions Were Not Properly Postscanned
A subroutine invoked from an SFC action was not properly postscanned when the SFC was configured for automatic reset Instructions and assignments may not have set their data to postscan values For example an Output Energize (OTE) instruction may not have cleared its data during postscan
Lgx00047935
In SFCs Configured for Auto Reset Stored Actions Were Not Properly Postscanned
When an SFC was configured for Automatic Reset and an Action used a stored qualifier (S SD SL DS) when a reset action (R) executed the action being reset was not postscanned
Lgx00047407
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
The controller did not support 32 consumed connections
Over EtherNetIP previous revisions of the CompactLogix controllers supported only 25 connections
The WallClockTime increased after power cycles
When the CompactLogix controllers had power cycled the controller wallclock time increased
The WallClockTime changed to an invalid value after restoring from CompactFlash at power up
If you use a CompactFlash card and have it set to ldquorestore on power uprdquo you may have needed to reset the wallclock time If maintaining an accurate wallclock time was crucial to your application you either had to disable the ldquorestore on power uprdquo feature or use a combination of GSV and SSV instructions to check the wallclock time and if necessary reset it to an accurate time
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 9
uni-directional homing failed to complete
A Motion Axis Home (MAH) instruction sometime failed to complete (IP bit remained on) under the following axis configuration
Return Speed = 0
uni-directional homing (forward or reverse)
unconditional MDR instruction did not re-execute
A Motion Disarm Registration (MDR) instruction failed to repeatedly execute under the following circumstances
You placed the MDR instruction in a structured text routine
You did not provide any conditions to control the execution of the instruction that is you programmed it to execute continuously)
In those circumstances the EN bit might have been left on after the first execution and the instruction no longer executed again
Important In structured text we recommend that you condition the instruction so that it only executes on a transition
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
10 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
blended moves produce smoother more accurate motion
This revision improves the response of the axes when you blend the execution of Motion Coordinated Linear Move (MCLM) and Motion Coordinated Circular Move (MCCM) instructions
large message (MSG) instructions might have caused a non-recoverable fault
The following configuration of a Message (MSG) instruction might have produced a non-recoverable fault
When the controller experiences a non-recoverable fault it clears the project from memory
during power up the controller erroneously showed a red IO LED
During power up the controller sometimes showed a flashing red IO LED when there was no problem
autotune produced unnecessary warnings
When you completed an autotune of an Enhanced PID (PIDE) function block instruction the Autotune Status field sometimes showed warning messages that were incorrect (did not apply)
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Termination Type0 = actual tolerance1 = no settle2 = command tolerance3 = no deceleration
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) axes change more smoothly and follow the intended path more closely
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) and the program path direction is reversed the instruction will exceed the specified accelerationdeceleration for the MCLM or MCCM instruction
Message type = CIP Data Table Read or Write
The instruction transferred gt 240 bytes
Communication was through the serial port
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 11
Known Anomalies The known anomalies are organized by the catalog number in which they are known to exist
Rampsoak (RMPS) instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode
On download a RampSoak (RMPS) Instruction now initializes to Operator Manual mode unless some other mode is requested
In previous revisions the instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode This lack of initialization could have caused the RMPS instruction to ignore the soak time for the first rampsoak segment
Remote output module momentarily dropped its connection
The following combination of circumstances occasionally caused an output module to drop its connection to the controller and then re-establish the connection
The module was in a remote chassis
The module used a Rack Optimization communication format
The controller also executed a Message (MSG) instruction that bridged across the backplane of that same remote chassis to another communication module
Occurred most frequently if the MSG instruction was not cached
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Table 6 Known Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Using RPI = 1ms with 1769-L20 and 1769-L30 controllers causes a fault on the Virtual Adapter
The RPI range for the CompactLogix Virtual Adapter was changed to allow settings from 1 ms - 750 ms for all CompactLogix controller types Currently the only CompactLogix controllers that support a 1 ms RPI are the 1769-L31 1769-L32E 1769-L35E controllers The 1769-L20 1769-L30 controllers support a 2 ms minimum RPI
You can configure a 1769-L20 1769-L30 controller project for 1 ms RPI since this appears as a valid range for the controller and you can download the project without error but the Virtual Adapter will be faulted The fault indicated on the Virtual Adapter Connection tab is ldquoRequested Packet Interval (RPI) out of rangerdquo The software indicates the setting is valid but the controller rejects the RPI because it is invalid
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
12 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Restrictions The restrictions are organized by the catalog number
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30
Table 7 Restrictions
Restriction DescriptionIn a tag of a user-defined data type an instruction may write past the end of an array
If you write too much data to an array that is within a user-defined data type some instructions write beyond the array and into other members of the tag
The following instructions write beyond the array into other members of the tag
This restriction also applies to all previous revisionsTo prevent writing beyond the limits of the destination array make sure the length operand of the instruction is less than or equal to the number of elements in the array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
hellipthe instruction stops at the end of the array
Example 1 Instruction Stops at the End of the Array
hellipthe instruction writes data beyond the end of the array into other members of the tag Regardless of the length specified for the instruction it stops writing if it reaches the end of the tag
Example 2 Instruction Writes Beyond the Array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
BSL
BSR
COP
CPS
DDT
FBC
FFL
FFU
FLL
GSV
LFL
LFU
SQL
SRT
SSV
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 13
Installing EDS Files If you have RSLinx software version 242 or greater the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an older version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files You need EDS files for
appropriate controller
1769 CompactBus
1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the EDS files that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware
To update the controller firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file 0001000E00410100eds installed
The EDS files are available on the CD for RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software version 13 The files are also available at
httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Loading Controller Firmware
The controller is shipped without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller The firmware for all CompactLogix controllers is available on the website and on the RSLogix 5000 CD To load firmware you can use
ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
AutoFlash that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
See the controller installation instructions for more information about using these utilities to load firmware
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
14 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Additional Memory Requirements
Revision 130 or later may require more memory than previous revisions for example 10x 11x To estimate the additional memory that your project may require use Table 8
Table 8
If you have this firmware revision (add all that apply)
Then add the following memory requirements to your project
Component Increase per instance
12x or earlier IO module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 90 bytes
IO module with a comm format = something other than Rack Optimization that is direct connection
144 bytes
CompactLogix 1769 IO module 170 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = None 160 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 220 bytes
11x or earlier tag that uses the MOTION_INSTRUCTION data type 4 bytes
tag for an axis
If the data type is And the tag is
AXIS_VIRTUAL produced for another controller 264 bytes
not produced for another controller 264 bytes
output cam execution targets 648 bytes
user-defined data type
number of user-defined data types in the controller organizer Data Types folder User-defined folder
not the use of that data type in tags
128 bytes
indirect address (using a tag as the subscript for an array in an instruction for example Array_A[Tag_B]) This memory change applies only if the array
uses a structure as its data type does not use one of these data types CONTROL COUNTER PID
or TIMER
has only one dimension for example UDT_1[5]
(-60 bytes)
10x or earlier programs 12 bytes
routines 16 bytes
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 15
Hold Last State and User-defined Safe State Not Supported
When 1769 Compact IO modules are used as local IO modules in a CompactLogix system the local IO modules do not support the Hold Last State or User-defined Safe State features even though you can configure these options in the programming software
If a local IO module fails such that the modulersquos communication to the controller is lost or if any module is disconnected from the system bus while under power the controller will go into the fault mode All outputs turn off when the system bus or any module faults
RSLogix 5000 software creates tags for modules when you add them to the IO configuration The 1769 module tags define configuration (C) data type members that may include attributes for alternate outputs CompactLogix does not enable local modules to use the alternate outputs Do not configure the attributes listed below
Any 1769 Compact IO modules used as remote IO modules in a CompactLogix system do support the Hold Last State and User-Defined Safe State features
For Digital Output Modules For Analog Output Modules
ProgToFaultEn
ProgMode
ProgValue
FaultMode
FaultValue
CHxProgToFaultEn
CHxProgMode
CHxFaultMode
where CHx = the channel number
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
16 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Verify IO Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used
Each module in a CompactLogix system uses a set amount of backplane memory in addition to the data that the module stores or transfers Some modules require a considerable amount of backplane memory Take this into account when designing your system because backplane memory usage affects how many modules a controller can support Each CompactLogix controller supports 256 16-bit words of backplane data Table 9 shows how many backplane words each module uses
(35 words input34 words output118 words configuration)
1769-SDN 76plus total words in scanlist
system overhead (per controller)
34 34
Total Words Required(1)
(1) The total words required cannot exceed 256 words
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 17
Compact IO CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx and RSLogix 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 5
For some non-recoverable faults the controller produces a major fault and may be able to log diagnostic information
If the controller detects a non-recoverable fault that was not caused by the controllerrsquos hardware the controller now responds as follows
If the controller Then
has a CompactFlash socket
The controller clears the project from its memory and produces a major fault (flashing red OK LED)
has no CompactFlash socket
The controller initially shows a solid red OK LED After you cycle power the controller produces a major fault (flashing red OK LED)
In either case the controller still clears the project from memory The fault code that the controller displays depends on whether you have installed a CompactFlash card in the controller
In previous revisions
The controller would not go to faulted mode or display a fault code for the type of situation described above
Controllers with a CompactFlash socket showed a solid red OK LED
Table 1 Enhancements
Enhancement Description
Type Code Cause Recovery Method
1 60 For a controller with no CompactFlash card installed the controller
detected a non-recoverable fault
cleared the project from memory
1 Clear the fault2 Download the project3 Change to Remote RunRun
modeIf the problem persists
1 Before you cycle power to the controller record the state of the OK and RS232 LEDs
2 Contact Rockwell Automation support See the back of this publication
1 61 For a controller with a CompactFlash card installed the controller
detected a non-recoverable fault
wrote diagnostic information to the CompactFlash card
cleared the project from memory
1 Clear the fault2 Download the project3 Change to Remote RunRun
modeIf the problem persists contact Rockwell Automation support See the back of this publication
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
6 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Changes Changes are organized by firmware revision in which the change occurred
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1317
Table 2 Changes
Change DescriptionIn a Message (MSG) instruction you cannot set or clear certain status bits
Do not set or clear the following members of a Message (MSG) instruction
EW
ER
DN
ST
Flags
Important If your logic currently manipulates any of the above members of a MSG instruction your controller may operate differently when you update to this revision
If you set or clear one of those bits RSLogix 5000 software displays the change But the MSG instruction ignores the change and continues to execute based on the internally-stored value of those bits
Motion planner no longer waits for consumed data to start flowing
The motion planner now begins execution immediately regardless of whether or not the planner is receiving data via a consumed axis
In previous revisions a consumed axis caused the motion planner to delay its execution until data started flowing from the producing controller Under the following combination of circumstances the motion task of the controller failed to start at all
The system included 2 controllers in the same chassis
Each controller produced an axis for the other controller
For Function Block Instructions that use periodic timing DeltaT now includes the fractional portion of the taskrsquos period
If your function block instruction uses the periodic timing mode the controller no longer truncates the fractional portion of a taskrsquos period to produce the delta time (DeltaT)
In previous revisions the controller truncated the fractional portion of the taskrsquos period
While in Program mode a motion group fault no longer produces a major fault
As an option you can configure a motion group to produce a major fault any time the group detects a motion fault
With this revision a motion group that is configured to produce a major fault produces a major fault only if the controller is in RunRemote Run mode
In previous revisions the motion group could produce a major fault while the controller was in ProgramRemote Program mode For example a store to nonvolatile memory interrupts the execution of the motion planner which produces a fault
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 7
Out-of-range subscript no longer produces a fault during prescan
During prescan the controller automatically clears any faults due to an array subscript that is beyond the range of the array (out of range)
In previous revisions this produced a major fault
Autotune now uses a non-integrating process model for temperature processes
When you autotune an Enhanced PID (PIDE) function block with the Process Type = Temperature autotune now uses a non-integrating process model to estimate tuning constants This gives better tuning constants for most application
In previous revisions autotune used an integrating process model
You must place a label (LBL) instruction at the start of a rung
If your logic includes a Label (LBL) instruction make sure the instruction is the first instruction on the rung If the instruction is not the first move the LBL instruction to the beginning of the rung Otherwise the routine will not verify
In previous revisions RSLogix 5000 software let you place the LBL instruction elsewhere on the rung But the controller always executed the instruction as if it were at the beginning of the rung
Reduction in the prescan time of projects with many jump to subroutine (JSR) instructions
During a prescan the controller no longer prescans a routine more than once Once the controller prescans a routine it does not prescan the routine again during that prescan
In previous revisions the controller would prescan a routine as often as the routine was called in logic For projects with many calls to subroutines this could produce a very long prescan and cause a watchdog timeout fault
Table 2 Changes
Change Description
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
8 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Corrected Anomalies The corrected anomalies are organized by the firmware revision that corrected them
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1319
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1318
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1317
Table 3 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Controller Occasionally Failed to Load Program at Power-Up
When the controller was powered up occasionally it did not load its program An internal check in the power-up sequence erroneously caused the controller not to load the program
Lgx00053881
Table 4 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Subroutines Invoked from SFC Actions Were Not Properly Postscanned
A subroutine invoked from an SFC action was not properly postscanned when the SFC was configured for automatic reset Instructions and assignments may not have set their data to postscan values For example an Output Energize (OTE) instruction may not have cleared its data during postscan
Lgx00047935
In SFCs Configured for Auto Reset Stored Actions Were Not Properly Postscanned
When an SFC was configured for Automatic Reset and an Action used a stored qualifier (S SD SL DS) when a reset action (R) executed the action being reset was not postscanned
Lgx00047407
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
The controller did not support 32 consumed connections
Over EtherNetIP previous revisions of the CompactLogix controllers supported only 25 connections
The WallClockTime increased after power cycles
When the CompactLogix controllers had power cycled the controller wallclock time increased
The WallClockTime changed to an invalid value after restoring from CompactFlash at power up
If you use a CompactFlash card and have it set to ldquorestore on power uprdquo you may have needed to reset the wallclock time If maintaining an accurate wallclock time was crucial to your application you either had to disable the ldquorestore on power uprdquo feature or use a combination of GSV and SSV instructions to check the wallclock time and if necessary reset it to an accurate time
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 9
uni-directional homing failed to complete
A Motion Axis Home (MAH) instruction sometime failed to complete (IP bit remained on) under the following axis configuration
Return Speed = 0
uni-directional homing (forward or reverse)
unconditional MDR instruction did not re-execute
A Motion Disarm Registration (MDR) instruction failed to repeatedly execute under the following circumstances
You placed the MDR instruction in a structured text routine
You did not provide any conditions to control the execution of the instruction that is you programmed it to execute continuously)
In those circumstances the EN bit might have been left on after the first execution and the instruction no longer executed again
Important In structured text we recommend that you condition the instruction so that it only executes on a transition
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
10 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
blended moves produce smoother more accurate motion
This revision improves the response of the axes when you blend the execution of Motion Coordinated Linear Move (MCLM) and Motion Coordinated Circular Move (MCCM) instructions
large message (MSG) instructions might have caused a non-recoverable fault
The following configuration of a Message (MSG) instruction might have produced a non-recoverable fault
When the controller experiences a non-recoverable fault it clears the project from memory
during power up the controller erroneously showed a red IO LED
During power up the controller sometimes showed a flashing red IO LED when there was no problem
autotune produced unnecessary warnings
When you completed an autotune of an Enhanced PID (PIDE) function block instruction the Autotune Status field sometimes showed warning messages that were incorrect (did not apply)
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Termination Type0 = actual tolerance1 = no settle2 = command tolerance3 = no deceleration
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) axes change more smoothly and follow the intended path more closely
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) and the program path direction is reversed the instruction will exceed the specified accelerationdeceleration for the MCLM or MCCM instruction
Message type = CIP Data Table Read or Write
The instruction transferred gt 240 bytes
Communication was through the serial port
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 11
Known Anomalies The known anomalies are organized by the catalog number in which they are known to exist
Rampsoak (RMPS) instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode
On download a RampSoak (RMPS) Instruction now initializes to Operator Manual mode unless some other mode is requested
In previous revisions the instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode This lack of initialization could have caused the RMPS instruction to ignore the soak time for the first rampsoak segment
Remote output module momentarily dropped its connection
The following combination of circumstances occasionally caused an output module to drop its connection to the controller and then re-establish the connection
The module was in a remote chassis
The module used a Rack Optimization communication format
The controller also executed a Message (MSG) instruction that bridged across the backplane of that same remote chassis to another communication module
Occurred most frequently if the MSG instruction was not cached
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Table 6 Known Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Using RPI = 1ms with 1769-L20 and 1769-L30 controllers causes a fault on the Virtual Adapter
The RPI range for the CompactLogix Virtual Adapter was changed to allow settings from 1 ms - 750 ms for all CompactLogix controller types Currently the only CompactLogix controllers that support a 1 ms RPI are the 1769-L31 1769-L32E 1769-L35E controllers The 1769-L20 1769-L30 controllers support a 2 ms minimum RPI
You can configure a 1769-L20 1769-L30 controller project for 1 ms RPI since this appears as a valid range for the controller and you can download the project without error but the Virtual Adapter will be faulted The fault indicated on the Virtual Adapter Connection tab is ldquoRequested Packet Interval (RPI) out of rangerdquo The software indicates the setting is valid but the controller rejects the RPI because it is invalid
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
12 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Restrictions The restrictions are organized by the catalog number
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30
Table 7 Restrictions
Restriction DescriptionIn a tag of a user-defined data type an instruction may write past the end of an array
If you write too much data to an array that is within a user-defined data type some instructions write beyond the array and into other members of the tag
The following instructions write beyond the array into other members of the tag
This restriction also applies to all previous revisionsTo prevent writing beyond the limits of the destination array make sure the length operand of the instruction is less than or equal to the number of elements in the array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
hellipthe instruction stops at the end of the array
Example 1 Instruction Stops at the End of the Array
hellipthe instruction writes data beyond the end of the array into other members of the tag Regardless of the length specified for the instruction it stops writing if it reaches the end of the tag
Example 2 Instruction Writes Beyond the Array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
BSL
BSR
COP
CPS
DDT
FBC
FFL
FFU
FLL
GSV
LFL
LFU
SQL
SRT
SSV
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 13
Installing EDS Files If you have RSLinx software version 242 or greater the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an older version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files You need EDS files for
appropriate controller
1769 CompactBus
1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the EDS files that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware
To update the controller firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file 0001000E00410100eds installed
The EDS files are available on the CD for RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software version 13 The files are also available at
httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Loading Controller Firmware
The controller is shipped without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller The firmware for all CompactLogix controllers is available on the website and on the RSLogix 5000 CD To load firmware you can use
ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
AutoFlash that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
See the controller installation instructions for more information about using these utilities to load firmware
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
14 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Additional Memory Requirements
Revision 130 or later may require more memory than previous revisions for example 10x 11x To estimate the additional memory that your project may require use Table 8
Table 8
If you have this firmware revision (add all that apply)
Then add the following memory requirements to your project
Component Increase per instance
12x or earlier IO module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 90 bytes
IO module with a comm format = something other than Rack Optimization that is direct connection
144 bytes
CompactLogix 1769 IO module 170 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = None 160 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 220 bytes
11x or earlier tag that uses the MOTION_INSTRUCTION data type 4 bytes
tag for an axis
If the data type is And the tag is
AXIS_VIRTUAL produced for another controller 264 bytes
not produced for another controller 264 bytes
output cam execution targets 648 bytes
user-defined data type
number of user-defined data types in the controller organizer Data Types folder User-defined folder
not the use of that data type in tags
128 bytes
indirect address (using a tag as the subscript for an array in an instruction for example Array_A[Tag_B]) This memory change applies only if the array
uses a structure as its data type does not use one of these data types CONTROL COUNTER PID
or TIMER
has only one dimension for example UDT_1[5]
(-60 bytes)
10x or earlier programs 12 bytes
routines 16 bytes
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 15
Hold Last State and User-defined Safe State Not Supported
When 1769 Compact IO modules are used as local IO modules in a CompactLogix system the local IO modules do not support the Hold Last State or User-defined Safe State features even though you can configure these options in the programming software
If a local IO module fails such that the modulersquos communication to the controller is lost or if any module is disconnected from the system bus while under power the controller will go into the fault mode All outputs turn off when the system bus or any module faults
RSLogix 5000 software creates tags for modules when you add them to the IO configuration The 1769 module tags define configuration (C) data type members that may include attributes for alternate outputs CompactLogix does not enable local modules to use the alternate outputs Do not configure the attributes listed below
Any 1769 Compact IO modules used as remote IO modules in a CompactLogix system do support the Hold Last State and User-Defined Safe State features
For Digital Output Modules For Analog Output Modules
ProgToFaultEn
ProgMode
ProgValue
FaultMode
FaultValue
CHxProgToFaultEn
CHxProgMode
CHxFaultMode
where CHx = the channel number
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
16 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Verify IO Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used
Each module in a CompactLogix system uses a set amount of backplane memory in addition to the data that the module stores or transfers Some modules require a considerable amount of backplane memory Take this into account when designing your system because backplane memory usage affects how many modules a controller can support Each CompactLogix controller supports 256 16-bit words of backplane data Table 9 shows how many backplane words each module uses
(35 words input34 words output118 words configuration)
1769-SDN 76plus total words in scanlist
system overhead (per controller)
34 34
Total Words Required(1)
(1) The total words required cannot exceed 256 words
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 17
Compact IO CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx and RSLogix 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
6 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Changes Changes are organized by firmware revision in which the change occurred
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1317
Table 2 Changes
Change DescriptionIn a Message (MSG) instruction you cannot set or clear certain status bits
Do not set or clear the following members of a Message (MSG) instruction
EW
ER
DN
ST
Flags
Important If your logic currently manipulates any of the above members of a MSG instruction your controller may operate differently when you update to this revision
If you set or clear one of those bits RSLogix 5000 software displays the change But the MSG instruction ignores the change and continues to execute based on the internally-stored value of those bits
Motion planner no longer waits for consumed data to start flowing
The motion planner now begins execution immediately regardless of whether or not the planner is receiving data via a consumed axis
In previous revisions a consumed axis caused the motion planner to delay its execution until data started flowing from the producing controller Under the following combination of circumstances the motion task of the controller failed to start at all
The system included 2 controllers in the same chassis
Each controller produced an axis for the other controller
For Function Block Instructions that use periodic timing DeltaT now includes the fractional portion of the taskrsquos period
If your function block instruction uses the periodic timing mode the controller no longer truncates the fractional portion of a taskrsquos period to produce the delta time (DeltaT)
In previous revisions the controller truncated the fractional portion of the taskrsquos period
While in Program mode a motion group fault no longer produces a major fault
As an option you can configure a motion group to produce a major fault any time the group detects a motion fault
With this revision a motion group that is configured to produce a major fault produces a major fault only if the controller is in RunRemote Run mode
In previous revisions the motion group could produce a major fault while the controller was in ProgramRemote Program mode For example a store to nonvolatile memory interrupts the execution of the motion planner which produces a fault
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 7
Out-of-range subscript no longer produces a fault during prescan
During prescan the controller automatically clears any faults due to an array subscript that is beyond the range of the array (out of range)
In previous revisions this produced a major fault
Autotune now uses a non-integrating process model for temperature processes
When you autotune an Enhanced PID (PIDE) function block with the Process Type = Temperature autotune now uses a non-integrating process model to estimate tuning constants This gives better tuning constants for most application
In previous revisions autotune used an integrating process model
You must place a label (LBL) instruction at the start of a rung
If your logic includes a Label (LBL) instruction make sure the instruction is the first instruction on the rung If the instruction is not the first move the LBL instruction to the beginning of the rung Otherwise the routine will not verify
In previous revisions RSLogix 5000 software let you place the LBL instruction elsewhere on the rung But the controller always executed the instruction as if it were at the beginning of the rung
Reduction in the prescan time of projects with many jump to subroutine (JSR) instructions
During a prescan the controller no longer prescans a routine more than once Once the controller prescans a routine it does not prescan the routine again during that prescan
In previous revisions the controller would prescan a routine as often as the routine was called in logic For projects with many calls to subroutines this could produce a very long prescan and cause a watchdog timeout fault
Table 2 Changes
Change Description
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
8 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Corrected Anomalies The corrected anomalies are organized by the firmware revision that corrected them
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1319
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1318
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1317
Table 3 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Controller Occasionally Failed to Load Program at Power-Up
When the controller was powered up occasionally it did not load its program An internal check in the power-up sequence erroneously caused the controller not to load the program
Lgx00053881
Table 4 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Subroutines Invoked from SFC Actions Were Not Properly Postscanned
A subroutine invoked from an SFC action was not properly postscanned when the SFC was configured for automatic reset Instructions and assignments may not have set their data to postscan values For example an Output Energize (OTE) instruction may not have cleared its data during postscan
Lgx00047935
In SFCs Configured for Auto Reset Stored Actions Were Not Properly Postscanned
When an SFC was configured for Automatic Reset and an Action used a stored qualifier (S SD SL DS) when a reset action (R) executed the action being reset was not postscanned
Lgx00047407
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
The controller did not support 32 consumed connections
Over EtherNetIP previous revisions of the CompactLogix controllers supported only 25 connections
The WallClockTime increased after power cycles
When the CompactLogix controllers had power cycled the controller wallclock time increased
The WallClockTime changed to an invalid value after restoring from CompactFlash at power up
If you use a CompactFlash card and have it set to ldquorestore on power uprdquo you may have needed to reset the wallclock time If maintaining an accurate wallclock time was crucial to your application you either had to disable the ldquorestore on power uprdquo feature or use a combination of GSV and SSV instructions to check the wallclock time and if necessary reset it to an accurate time
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 9
uni-directional homing failed to complete
A Motion Axis Home (MAH) instruction sometime failed to complete (IP bit remained on) under the following axis configuration
Return Speed = 0
uni-directional homing (forward or reverse)
unconditional MDR instruction did not re-execute
A Motion Disarm Registration (MDR) instruction failed to repeatedly execute under the following circumstances
You placed the MDR instruction in a structured text routine
You did not provide any conditions to control the execution of the instruction that is you programmed it to execute continuously)
In those circumstances the EN bit might have been left on after the first execution and the instruction no longer executed again
Important In structured text we recommend that you condition the instruction so that it only executes on a transition
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
10 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
blended moves produce smoother more accurate motion
This revision improves the response of the axes when you blend the execution of Motion Coordinated Linear Move (MCLM) and Motion Coordinated Circular Move (MCCM) instructions
large message (MSG) instructions might have caused a non-recoverable fault
The following configuration of a Message (MSG) instruction might have produced a non-recoverable fault
When the controller experiences a non-recoverable fault it clears the project from memory
during power up the controller erroneously showed a red IO LED
During power up the controller sometimes showed a flashing red IO LED when there was no problem
autotune produced unnecessary warnings
When you completed an autotune of an Enhanced PID (PIDE) function block instruction the Autotune Status field sometimes showed warning messages that were incorrect (did not apply)
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Termination Type0 = actual tolerance1 = no settle2 = command tolerance3 = no deceleration
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) axes change more smoothly and follow the intended path more closely
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) and the program path direction is reversed the instruction will exceed the specified accelerationdeceleration for the MCLM or MCCM instruction
Message type = CIP Data Table Read or Write
The instruction transferred gt 240 bytes
Communication was through the serial port
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 11
Known Anomalies The known anomalies are organized by the catalog number in which they are known to exist
Rampsoak (RMPS) instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode
On download a RampSoak (RMPS) Instruction now initializes to Operator Manual mode unless some other mode is requested
In previous revisions the instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode This lack of initialization could have caused the RMPS instruction to ignore the soak time for the first rampsoak segment
Remote output module momentarily dropped its connection
The following combination of circumstances occasionally caused an output module to drop its connection to the controller and then re-establish the connection
The module was in a remote chassis
The module used a Rack Optimization communication format
The controller also executed a Message (MSG) instruction that bridged across the backplane of that same remote chassis to another communication module
Occurred most frequently if the MSG instruction was not cached
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Table 6 Known Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Using RPI = 1ms with 1769-L20 and 1769-L30 controllers causes a fault on the Virtual Adapter
The RPI range for the CompactLogix Virtual Adapter was changed to allow settings from 1 ms - 750 ms for all CompactLogix controller types Currently the only CompactLogix controllers that support a 1 ms RPI are the 1769-L31 1769-L32E 1769-L35E controllers The 1769-L20 1769-L30 controllers support a 2 ms minimum RPI
You can configure a 1769-L20 1769-L30 controller project for 1 ms RPI since this appears as a valid range for the controller and you can download the project without error but the Virtual Adapter will be faulted The fault indicated on the Virtual Adapter Connection tab is ldquoRequested Packet Interval (RPI) out of rangerdquo The software indicates the setting is valid but the controller rejects the RPI because it is invalid
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
12 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Restrictions The restrictions are organized by the catalog number
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30
Table 7 Restrictions
Restriction DescriptionIn a tag of a user-defined data type an instruction may write past the end of an array
If you write too much data to an array that is within a user-defined data type some instructions write beyond the array and into other members of the tag
The following instructions write beyond the array into other members of the tag
This restriction also applies to all previous revisionsTo prevent writing beyond the limits of the destination array make sure the length operand of the instruction is less than or equal to the number of elements in the array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
hellipthe instruction stops at the end of the array
Example 1 Instruction Stops at the End of the Array
hellipthe instruction writes data beyond the end of the array into other members of the tag Regardless of the length specified for the instruction it stops writing if it reaches the end of the tag
Example 2 Instruction Writes Beyond the Array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
BSL
BSR
COP
CPS
DDT
FBC
FFL
FFU
FLL
GSV
LFL
LFU
SQL
SRT
SSV
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 13
Installing EDS Files If you have RSLinx software version 242 or greater the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an older version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files You need EDS files for
appropriate controller
1769 CompactBus
1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the EDS files that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware
To update the controller firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file 0001000E00410100eds installed
The EDS files are available on the CD for RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software version 13 The files are also available at
httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Loading Controller Firmware
The controller is shipped without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller The firmware for all CompactLogix controllers is available on the website and on the RSLogix 5000 CD To load firmware you can use
ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
AutoFlash that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
See the controller installation instructions for more information about using these utilities to load firmware
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
14 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Additional Memory Requirements
Revision 130 or later may require more memory than previous revisions for example 10x 11x To estimate the additional memory that your project may require use Table 8
Table 8
If you have this firmware revision (add all that apply)
Then add the following memory requirements to your project
Component Increase per instance
12x or earlier IO module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 90 bytes
IO module with a comm format = something other than Rack Optimization that is direct connection
144 bytes
CompactLogix 1769 IO module 170 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = None 160 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 220 bytes
11x or earlier tag that uses the MOTION_INSTRUCTION data type 4 bytes
tag for an axis
If the data type is And the tag is
AXIS_VIRTUAL produced for another controller 264 bytes
not produced for another controller 264 bytes
output cam execution targets 648 bytes
user-defined data type
number of user-defined data types in the controller organizer Data Types folder User-defined folder
not the use of that data type in tags
128 bytes
indirect address (using a tag as the subscript for an array in an instruction for example Array_A[Tag_B]) This memory change applies only if the array
uses a structure as its data type does not use one of these data types CONTROL COUNTER PID
or TIMER
has only one dimension for example UDT_1[5]
(-60 bytes)
10x or earlier programs 12 bytes
routines 16 bytes
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 15
Hold Last State and User-defined Safe State Not Supported
When 1769 Compact IO modules are used as local IO modules in a CompactLogix system the local IO modules do not support the Hold Last State or User-defined Safe State features even though you can configure these options in the programming software
If a local IO module fails such that the modulersquos communication to the controller is lost or if any module is disconnected from the system bus while under power the controller will go into the fault mode All outputs turn off when the system bus or any module faults
RSLogix 5000 software creates tags for modules when you add them to the IO configuration The 1769 module tags define configuration (C) data type members that may include attributes for alternate outputs CompactLogix does not enable local modules to use the alternate outputs Do not configure the attributes listed below
Any 1769 Compact IO modules used as remote IO modules in a CompactLogix system do support the Hold Last State and User-Defined Safe State features
For Digital Output Modules For Analog Output Modules
ProgToFaultEn
ProgMode
ProgValue
FaultMode
FaultValue
CHxProgToFaultEn
CHxProgMode
CHxFaultMode
where CHx = the channel number
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
16 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Verify IO Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used
Each module in a CompactLogix system uses a set amount of backplane memory in addition to the data that the module stores or transfers Some modules require a considerable amount of backplane memory Take this into account when designing your system because backplane memory usage affects how many modules a controller can support Each CompactLogix controller supports 256 16-bit words of backplane data Table 9 shows how many backplane words each module uses
(35 words input34 words output118 words configuration)
1769-SDN 76plus total words in scanlist
system overhead (per controller)
34 34
Total Words Required(1)
(1) The total words required cannot exceed 256 words
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 17
Compact IO CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx and RSLogix 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 7
Out-of-range subscript no longer produces a fault during prescan
During prescan the controller automatically clears any faults due to an array subscript that is beyond the range of the array (out of range)
In previous revisions this produced a major fault
Autotune now uses a non-integrating process model for temperature processes
When you autotune an Enhanced PID (PIDE) function block with the Process Type = Temperature autotune now uses a non-integrating process model to estimate tuning constants This gives better tuning constants for most application
In previous revisions autotune used an integrating process model
You must place a label (LBL) instruction at the start of a rung
If your logic includes a Label (LBL) instruction make sure the instruction is the first instruction on the rung If the instruction is not the first move the LBL instruction to the beginning of the rung Otherwise the routine will not verify
In previous revisions RSLogix 5000 software let you place the LBL instruction elsewhere on the rung But the controller always executed the instruction as if it were at the beginning of the rung
Reduction in the prescan time of projects with many jump to subroutine (JSR) instructions
During a prescan the controller no longer prescans a routine more than once Once the controller prescans a routine it does not prescan the routine again during that prescan
In previous revisions the controller would prescan a routine as often as the routine was called in logic For projects with many calls to subroutines this could produce a very long prescan and cause a watchdog timeout fault
Table 2 Changes
Change Description
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
8 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Corrected Anomalies The corrected anomalies are organized by the firmware revision that corrected them
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1319
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1318
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1317
Table 3 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Controller Occasionally Failed to Load Program at Power-Up
When the controller was powered up occasionally it did not load its program An internal check in the power-up sequence erroneously caused the controller not to load the program
Lgx00053881
Table 4 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Subroutines Invoked from SFC Actions Were Not Properly Postscanned
A subroutine invoked from an SFC action was not properly postscanned when the SFC was configured for automatic reset Instructions and assignments may not have set their data to postscan values For example an Output Energize (OTE) instruction may not have cleared its data during postscan
Lgx00047935
In SFCs Configured for Auto Reset Stored Actions Were Not Properly Postscanned
When an SFC was configured for Automatic Reset and an Action used a stored qualifier (S SD SL DS) when a reset action (R) executed the action being reset was not postscanned
Lgx00047407
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
The controller did not support 32 consumed connections
Over EtherNetIP previous revisions of the CompactLogix controllers supported only 25 connections
The WallClockTime increased after power cycles
When the CompactLogix controllers had power cycled the controller wallclock time increased
The WallClockTime changed to an invalid value after restoring from CompactFlash at power up
If you use a CompactFlash card and have it set to ldquorestore on power uprdquo you may have needed to reset the wallclock time If maintaining an accurate wallclock time was crucial to your application you either had to disable the ldquorestore on power uprdquo feature or use a combination of GSV and SSV instructions to check the wallclock time and if necessary reset it to an accurate time
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 9
uni-directional homing failed to complete
A Motion Axis Home (MAH) instruction sometime failed to complete (IP bit remained on) under the following axis configuration
Return Speed = 0
uni-directional homing (forward or reverse)
unconditional MDR instruction did not re-execute
A Motion Disarm Registration (MDR) instruction failed to repeatedly execute under the following circumstances
You placed the MDR instruction in a structured text routine
You did not provide any conditions to control the execution of the instruction that is you programmed it to execute continuously)
In those circumstances the EN bit might have been left on after the first execution and the instruction no longer executed again
Important In structured text we recommend that you condition the instruction so that it only executes on a transition
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
10 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
blended moves produce smoother more accurate motion
This revision improves the response of the axes when you blend the execution of Motion Coordinated Linear Move (MCLM) and Motion Coordinated Circular Move (MCCM) instructions
large message (MSG) instructions might have caused a non-recoverable fault
The following configuration of a Message (MSG) instruction might have produced a non-recoverable fault
When the controller experiences a non-recoverable fault it clears the project from memory
during power up the controller erroneously showed a red IO LED
During power up the controller sometimes showed a flashing red IO LED when there was no problem
autotune produced unnecessary warnings
When you completed an autotune of an Enhanced PID (PIDE) function block instruction the Autotune Status field sometimes showed warning messages that were incorrect (did not apply)
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Termination Type0 = actual tolerance1 = no settle2 = command tolerance3 = no deceleration
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) axes change more smoothly and follow the intended path more closely
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) and the program path direction is reversed the instruction will exceed the specified accelerationdeceleration for the MCLM or MCCM instruction
Message type = CIP Data Table Read or Write
The instruction transferred gt 240 bytes
Communication was through the serial port
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 11
Known Anomalies The known anomalies are organized by the catalog number in which they are known to exist
Rampsoak (RMPS) instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode
On download a RampSoak (RMPS) Instruction now initializes to Operator Manual mode unless some other mode is requested
In previous revisions the instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode This lack of initialization could have caused the RMPS instruction to ignore the soak time for the first rampsoak segment
Remote output module momentarily dropped its connection
The following combination of circumstances occasionally caused an output module to drop its connection to the controller and then re-establish the connection
The module was in a remote chassis
The module used a Rack Optimization communication format
The controller also executed a Message (MSG) instruction that bridged across the backplane of that same remote chassis to another communication module
Occurred most frequently if the MSG instruction was not cached
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Table 6 Known Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Using RPI = 1ms with 1769-L20 and 1769-L30 controllers causes a fault on the Virtual Adapter
The RPI range for the CompactLogix Virtual Adapter was changed to allow settings from 1 ms - 750 ms for all CompactLogix controller types Currently the only CompactLogix controllers that support a 1 ms RPI are the 1769-L31 1769-L32E 1769-L35E controllers The 1769-L20 1769-L30 controllers support a 2 ms minimum RPI
You can configure a 1769-L20 1769-L30 controller project for 1 ms RPI since this appears as a valid range for the controller and you can download the project without error but the Virtual Adapter will be faulted The fault indicated on the Virtual Adapter Connection tab is ldquoRequested Packet Interval (RPI) out of rangerdquo The software indicates the setting is valid but the controller rejects the RPI because it is invalid
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
12 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Restrictions The restrictions are organized by the catalog number
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30
Table 7 Restrictions
Restriction DescriptionIn a tag of a user-defined data type an instruction may write past the end of an array
If you write too much data to an array that is within a user-defined data type some instructions write beyond the array and into other members of the tag
The following instructions write beyond the array into other members of the tag
This restriction also applies to all previous revisionsTo prevent writing beyond the limits of the destination array make sure the length operand of the instruction is less than or equal to the number of elements in the array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
hellipthe instruction stops at the end of the array
Example 1 Instruction Stops at the End of the Array
hellipthe instruction writes data beyond the end of the array into other members of the tag Regardless of the length specified for the instruction it stops writing if it reaches the end of the tag
Example 2 Instruction Writes Beyond the Array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
BSL
BSR
COP
CPS
DDT
FBC
FFL
FFU
FLL
GSV
LFL
LFU
SQL
SRT
SSV
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 13
Installing EDS Files If you have RSLinx software version 242 or greater the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an older version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files You need EDS files for
appropriate controller
1769 CompactBus
1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the EDS files that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware
To update the controller firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file 0001000E00410100eds installed
The EDS files are available on the CD for RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software version 13 The files are also available at
httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Loading Controller Firmware
The controller is shipped without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller The firmware for all CompactLogix controllers is available on the website and on the RSLogix 5000 CD To load firmware you can use
ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
AutoFlash that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
See the controller installation instructions for more information about using these utilities to load firmware
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
14 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Additional Memory Requirements
Revision 130 or later may require more memory than previous revisions for example 10x 11x To estimate the additional memory that your project may require use Table 8
Table 8
If you have this firmware revision (add all that apply)
Then add the following memory requirements to your project
Component Increase per instance
12x or earlier IO module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 90 bytes
IO module with a comm format = something other than Rack Optimization that is direct connection
144 bytes
CompactLogix 1769 IO module 170 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = None 160 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 220 bytes
11x or earlier tag that uses the MOTION_INSTRUCTION data type 4 bytes
tag for an axis
If the data type is And the tag is
AXIS_VIRTUAL produced for another controller 264 bytes
not produced for another controller 264 bytes
output cam execution targets 648 bytes
user-defined data type
number of user-defined data types in the controller organizer Data Types folder User-defined folder
not the use of that data type in tags
128 bytes
indirect address (using a tag as the subscript for an array in an instruction for example Array_A[Tag_B]) This memory change applies only if the array
uses a structure as its data type does not use one of these data types CONTROL COUNTER PID
or TIMER
has only one dimension for example UDT_1[5]
(-60 bytes)
10x or earlier programs 12 bytes
routines 16 bytes
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 15
Hold Last State and User-defined Safe State Not Supported
When 1769 Compact IO modules are used as local IO modules in a CompactLogix system the local IO modules do not support the Hold Last State or User-defined Safe State features even though you can configure these options in the programming software
If a local IO module fails such that the modulersquos communication to the controller is lost or if any module is disconnected from the system bus while under power the controller will go into the fault mode All outputs turn off when the system bus or any module faults
RSLogix 5000 software creates tags for modules when you add them to the IO configuration The 1769 module tags define configuration (C) data type members that may include attributes for alternate outputs CompactLogix does not enable local modules to use the alternate outputs Do not configure the attributes listed below
Any 1769 Compact IO modules used as remote IO modules in a CompactLogix system do support the Hold Last State and User-Defined Safe State features
For Digital Output Modules For Analog Output Modules
ProgToFaultEn
ProgMode
ProgValue
FaultMode
FaultValue
CHxProgToFaultEn
CHxProgMode
CHxFaultMode
where CHx = the channel number
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
16 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Verify IO Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used
Each module in a CompactLogix system uses a set amount of backplane memory in addition to the data that the module stores or transfers Some modules require a considerable amount of backplane memory Take this into account when designing your system because backplane memory usage affects how many modules a controller can support Each CompactLogix controller supports 256 16-bit words of backplane data Table 9 shows how many backplane words each module uses
(35 words input34 words output118 words configuration)
1769-SDN 76plus total words in scanlist
system overhead (per controller)
34 34
Total Words Required(1)
(1) The total words required cannot exceed 256 words
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 17
Compact IO CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx and RSLogix 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
8 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Corrected Anomalies The corrected anomalies are organized by the firmware revision that corrected them
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1319
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1318
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30 Rev 1317
Table 3 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Controller Occasionally Failed to Load Program at Power-Up
When the controller was powered up occasionally it did not load its program An internal check in the power-up sequence erroneously caused the controller not to load the program
Lgx00053881
Table 4 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Subroutines Invoked from SFC Actions Were Not Properly Postscanned
A subroutine invoked from an SFC action was not properly postscanned when the SFC was configured for automatic reset Instructions and assignments may not have set their data to postscan values For example an Output Energize (OTE) instruction may not have cleared its data during postscan
Lgx00047935
In SFCs Configured for Auto Reset Stored Actions Were Not Properly Postscanned
When an SFC was configured for Automatic Reset and an Action used a stored qualifier (S SD SL DS) when a reset action (R) executed the action being reset was not postscanned
Lgx00047407
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
The controller did not support 32 consumed connections
Over EtherNetIP previous revisions of the CompactLogix controllers supported only 25 connections
The WallClockTime increased after power cycles
When the CompactLogix controllers had power cycled the controller wallclock time increased
The WallClockTime changed to an invalid value after restoring from CompactFlash at power up
If you use a CompactFlash card and have it set to ldquorestore on power uprdquo you may have needed to reset the wallclock time If maintaining an accurate wallclock time was crucial to your application you either had to disable the ldquorestore on power uprdquo feature or use a combination of GSV and SSV instructions to check the wallclock time and if necessary reset it to an accurate time
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 9
uni-directional homing failed to complete
A Motion Axis Home (MAH) instruction sometime failed to complete (IP bit remained on) under the following axis configuration
Return Speed = 0
uni-directional homing (forward or reverse)
unconditional MDR instruction did not re-execute
A Motion Disarm Registration (MDR) instruction failed to repeatedly execute under the following circumstances
You placed the MDR instruction in a structured text routine
You did not provide any conditions to control the execution of the instruction that is you programmed it to execute continuously)
In those circumstances the EN bit might have been left on after the first execution and the instruction no longer executed again
Important In structured text we recommend that you condition the instruction so that it only executes on a transition
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
10 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
blended moves produce smoother more accurate motion
This revision improves the response of the axes when you blend the execution of Motion Coordinated Linear Move (MCLM) and Motion Coordinated Circular Move (MCCM) instructions
large message (MSG) instructions might have caused a non-recoverable fault
The following configuration of a Message (MSG) instruction might have produced a non-recoverable fault
When the controller experiences a non-recoverable fault it clears the project from memory
during power up the controller erroneously showed a red IO LED
During power up the controller sometimes showed a flashing red IO LED when there was no problem
autotune produced unnecessary warnings
When you completed an autotune of an Enhanced PID (PIDE) function block instruction the Autotune Status field sometimes showed warning messages that were incorrect (did not apply)
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Termination Type0 = actual tolerance1 = no settle2 = command tolerance3 = no deceleration
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) axes change more smoothly and follow the intended path more closely
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) and the program path direction is reversed the instruction will exceed the specified accelerationdeceleration for the MCLM or MCCM instruction
Message type = CIP Data Table Read or Write
The instruction transferred gt 240 bytes
Communication was through the serial port
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 11
Known Anomalies The known anomalies are organized by the catalog number in which they are known to exist
Rampsoak (RMPS) instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode
On download a RampSoak (RMPS) Instruction now initializes to Operator Manual mode unless some other mode is requested
In previous revisions the instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode This lack of initialization could have caused the RMPS instruction to ignore the soak time for the first rampsoak segment
Remote output module momentarily dropped its connection
The following combination of circumstances occasionally caused an output module to drop its connection to the controller and then re-establish the connection
The module was in a remote chassis
The module used a Rack Optimization communication format
The controller also executed a Message (MSG) instruction that bridged across the backplane of that same remote chassis to another communication module
Occurred most frequently if the MSG instruction was not cached
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Table 6 Known Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Using RPI = 1ms with 1769-L20 and 1769-L30 controllers causes a fault on the Virtual Adapter
The RPI range for the CompactLogix Virtual Adapter was changed to allow settings from 1 ms - 750 ms for all CompactLogix controller types Currently the only CompactLogix controllers that support a 1 ms RPI are the 1769-L31 1769-L32E 1769-L35E controllers The 1769-L20 1769-L30 controllers support a 2 ms minimum RPI
You can configure a 1769-L20 1769-L30 controller project for 1 ms RPI since this appears as a valid range for the controller and you can download the project without error but the Virtual Adapter will be faulted The fault indicated on the Virtual Adapter Connection tab is ldquoRequested Packet Interval (RPI) out of rangerdquo The software indicates the setting is valid but the controller rejects the RPI because it is invalid
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
12 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Restrictions The restrictions are organized by the catalog number
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30
Table 7 Restrictions
Restriction DescriptionIn a tag of a user-defined data type an instruction may write past the end of an array
If you write too much data to an array that is within a user-defined data type some instructions write beyond the array and into other members of the tag
The following instructions write beyond the array into other members of the tag
This restriction also applies to all previous revisionsTo prevent writing beyond the limits of the destination array make sure the length operand of the instruction is less than or equal to the number of elements in the array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
hellipthe instruction stops at the end of the array
Example 1 Instruction Stops at the End of the Array
hellipthe instruction writes data beyond the end of the array into other members of the tag Regardless of the length specified for the instruction it stops writing if it reaches the end of the tag
Example 2 Instruction Writes Beyond the Array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
BSL
BSR
COP
CPS
DDT
FBC
FFL
FFU
FLL
GSV
LFL
LFU
SQL
SRT
SSV
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 13
Installing EDS Files If you have RSLinx software version 242 or greater the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an older version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files You need EDS files for
appropriate controller
1769 CompactBus
1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the EDS files that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware
To update the controller firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file 0001000E00410100eds installed
The EDS files are available on the CD for RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software version 13 The files are also available at
httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Loading Controller Firmware
The controller is shipped without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller The firmware for all CompactLogix controllers is available on the website and on the RSLogix 5000 CD To load firmware you can use
ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
AutoFlash that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
See the controller installation instructions for more information about using these utilities to load firmware
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
14 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Additional Memory Requirements
Revision 130 or later may require more memory than previous revisions for example 10x 11x To estimate the additional memory that your project may require use Table 8
Table 8
If you have this firmware revision (add all that apply)
Then add the following memory requirements to your project
Component Increase per instance
12x or earlier IO module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 90 bytes
IO module with a comm format = something other than Rack Optimization that is direct connection
144 bytes
CompactLogix 1769 IO module 170 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = None 160 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 220 bytes
11x or earlier tag that uses the MOTION_INSTRUCTION data type 4 bytes
tag for an axis
If the data type is And the tag is
AXIS_VIRTUAL produced for another controller 264 bytes
not produced for another controller 264 bytes
output cam execution targets 648 bytes
user-defined data type
number of user-defined data types in the controller organizer Data Types folder User-defined folder
not the use of that data type in tags
128 bytes
indirect address (using a tag as the subscript for an array in an instruction for example Array_A[Tag_B]) This memory change applies only if the array
uses a structure as its data type does not use one of these data types CONTROL COUNTER PID
or TIMER
has only one dimension for example UDT_1[5]
(-60 bytes)
10x or earlier programs 12 bytes
routines 16 bytes
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 15
Hold Last State and User-defined Safe State Not Supported
When 1769 Compact IO modules are used as local IO modules in a CompactLogix system the local IO modules do not support the Hold Last State or User-defined Safe State features even though you can configure these options in the programming software
If a local IO module fails such that the modulersquos communication to the controller is lost or if any module is disconnected from the system bus while under power the controller will go into the fault mode All outputs turn off when the system bus or any module faults
RSLogix 5000 software creates tags for modules when you add them to the IO configuration The 1769 module tags define configuration (C) data type members that may include attributes for alternate outputs CompactLogix does not enable local modules to use the alternate outputs Do not configure the attributes listed below
Any 1769 Compact IO modules used as remote IO modules in a CompactLogix system do support the Hold Last State and User-Defined Safe State features
For Digital Output Modules For Analog Output Modules
ProgToFaultEn
ProgMode
ProgValue
FaultMode
FaultValue
CHxProgToFaultEn
CHxProgMode
CHxFaultMode
where CHx = the channel number
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
16 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Verify IO Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used
Each module in a CompactLogix system uses a set amount of backplane memory in addition to the data that the module stores or transfers Some modules require a considerable amount of backplane memory Take this into account when designing your system because backplane memory usage affects how many modules a controller can support Each CompactLogix controller supports 256 16-bit words of backplane data Table 9 shows how many backplane words each module uses
(35 words input34 words output118 words configuration)
1769-SDN 76plus total words in scanlist
system overhead (per controller)
34 34
Total Words Required(1)
(1) The total words required cannot exceed 256 words
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 17
Compact IO CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx and RSLogix 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 9
uni-directional homing failed to complete
A Motion Axis Home (MAH) instruction sometime failed to complete (IP bit remained on) under the following axis configuration
Return Speed = 0
uni-directional homing (forward or reverse)
unconditional MDR instruction did not re-execute
A Motion Disarm Registration (MDR) instruction failed to repeatedly execute under the following circumstances
You placed the MDR instruction in a structured text routine
You did not provide any conditions to control the execution of the instruction that is you programmed it to execute continuously)
In those circumstances the EN bit might have been left on after the first execution and the instruction no longer executed again
Important In structured text we recommend that you condition the instruction so that it only executes on a transition
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
10 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
blended moves produce smoother more accurate motion
This revision improves the response of the axes when you blend the execution of Motion Coordinated Linear Move (MCLM) and Motion Coordinated Circular Move (MCCM) instructions
large message (MSG) instructions might have caused a non-recoverable fault
The following configuration of a Message (MSG) instruction might have produced a non-recoverable fault
When the controller experiences a non-recoverable fault it clears the project from memory
during power up the controller erroneously showed a red IO LED
During power up the controller sometimes showed a flashing red IO LED when there was no problem
autotune produced unnecessary warnings
When you completed an autotune of an Enhanced PID (PIDE) function block instruction the Autotune Status field sometimes showed warning messages that were incorrect (did not apply)
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Termination Type0 = actual tolerance1 = no settle2 = command tolerance3 = no deceleration
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) axes change more smoothly and follow the intended path more closely
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) and the program path direction is reversed the instruction will exceed the specified accelerationdeceleration for the MCLM or MCCM instruction
Message type = CIP Data Table Read or Write
The instruction transferred gt 240 bytes
Communication was through the serial port
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 11
Known Anomalies The known anomalies are organized by the catalog number in which they are known to exist
Rampsoak (RMPS) instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode
On download a RampSoak (RMPS) Instruction now initializes to Operator Manual mode unless some other mode is requested
In previous revisions the instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode This lack of initialization could have caused the RMPS instruction to ignore the soak time for the first rampsoak segment
Remote output module momentarily dropped its connection
The following combination of circumstances occasionally caused an output module to drop its connection to the controller and then re-establish the connection
The module was in a remote chassis
The module used a Rack Optimization communication format
The controller also executed a Message (MSG) instruction that bridged across the backplane of that same remote chassis to another communication module
Occurred most frequently if the MSG instruction was not cached
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Table 6 Known Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Using RPI = 1ms with 1769-L20 and 1769-L30 controllers causes a fault on the Virtual Adapter
The RPI range for the CompactLogix Virtual Adapter was changed to allow settings from 1 ms - 750 ms for all CompactLogix controller types Currently the only CompactLogix controllers that support a 1 ms RPI are the 1769-L31 1769-L32E 1769-L35E controllers The 1769-L20 1769-L30 controllers support a 2 ms minimum RPI
You can configure a 1769-L20 1769-L30 controller project for 1 ms RPI since this appears as a valid range for the controller and you can download the project without error but the Virtual Adapter will be faulted The fault indicated on the Virtual Adapter Connection tab is ldquoRequested Packet Interval (RPI) out of rangerdquo The software indicates the setting is valid but the controller rejects the RPI because it is invalid
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
12 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Restrictions The restrictions are organized by the catalog number
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30
Table 7 Restrictions
Restriction DescriptionIn a tag of a user-defined data type an instruction may write past the end of an array
If you write too much data to an array that is within a user-defined data type some instructions write beyond the array and into other members of the tag
The following instructions write beyond the array into other members of the tag
This restriction also applies to all previous revisionsTo prevent writing beyond the limits of the destination array make sure the length operand of the instruction is less than or equal to the number of elements in the array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
hellipthe instruction stops at the end of the array
Example 1 Instruction Stops at the End of the Array
hellipthe instruction writes data beyond the end of the array into other members of the tag Regardless of the length specified for the instruction it stops writing if it reaches the end of the tag
Example 2 Instruction Writes Beyond the Array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
BSL
BSR
COP
CPS
DDT
FBC
FFL
FFU
FLL
GSV
LFL
LFU
SQL
SRT
SSV
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 13
Installing EDS Files If you have RSLinx software version 242 or greater the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an older version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files You need EDS files for
appropriate controller
1769 CompactBus
1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the EDS files that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware
To update the controller firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file 0001000E00410100eds installed
The EDS files are available on the CD for RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software version 13 The files are also available at
httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Loading Controller Firmware
The controller is shipped without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller The firmware for all CompactLogix controllers is available on the website and on the RSLogix 5000 CD To load firmware you can use
ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
AutoFlash that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
See the controller installation instructions for more information about using these utilities to load firmware
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
14 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Additional Memory Requirements
Revision 130 or later may require more memory than previous revisions for example 10x 11x To estimate the additional memory that your project may require use Table 8
Table 8
If you have this firmware revision (add all that apply)
Then add the following memory requirements to your project
Component Increase per instance
12x or earlier IO module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 90 bytes
IO module with a comm format = something other than Rack Optimization that is direct connection
144 bytes
CompactLogix 1769 IO module 170 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = None 160 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 220 bytes
11x or earlier tag that uses the MOTION_INSTRUCTION data type 4 bytes
tag for an axis
If the data type is And the tag is
AXIS_VIRTUAL produced for another controller 264 bytes
not produced for another controller 264 bytes
output cam execution targets 648 bytes
user-defined data type
number of user-defined data types in the controller organizer Data Types folder User-defined folder
not the use of that data type in tags
128 bytes
indirect address (using a tag as the subscript for an array in an instruction for example Array_A[Tag_B]) This memory change applies only if the array
uses a structure as its data type does not use one of these data types CONTROL COUNTER PID
or TIMER
has only one dimension for example UDT_1[5]
(-60 bytes)
10x or earlier programs 12 bytes
routines 16 bytes
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 15
Hold Last State and User-defined Safe State Not Supported
When 1769 Compact IO modules are used as local IO modules in a CompactLogix system the local IO modules do not support the Hold Last State or User-defined Safe State features even though you can configure these options in the programming software
If a local IO module fails such that the modulersquos communication to the controller is lost or if any module is disconnected from the system bus while under power the controller will go into the fault mode All outputs turn off when the system bus or any module faults
RSLogix 5000 software creates tags for modules when you add them to the IO configuration The 1769 module tags define configuration (C) data type members that may include attributes for alternate outputs CompactLogix does not enable local modules to use the alternate outputs Do not configure the attributes listed below
Any 1769 Compact IO modules used as remote IO modules in a CompactLogix system do support the Hold Last State and User-Defined Safe State features
For Digital Output Modules For Analog Output Modules
ProgToFaultEn
ProgMode
ProgValue
FaultMode
FaultValue
CHxProgToFaultEn
CHxProgMode
CHxFaultMode
where CHx = the channel number
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
16 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Verify IO Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used
Each module in a CompactLogix system uses a set amount of backplane memory in addition to the data that the module stores or transfers Some modules require a considerable amount of backplane memory Take this into account when designing your system because backplane memory usage affects how many modules a controller can support Each CompactLogix controller supports 256 16-bit words of backplane data Table 9 shows how many backplane words each module uses
(35 words input34 words output118 words configuration)
1769-SDN 76plus total words in scanlist
system overhead (per controller)
34 34
Total Words Required(1)
(1) The total words required cannot exceed 256 words
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 17
Compact IO CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx and RSLogix 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
10 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
blended moves produce smoother more accurate motion
This revision improves the response of the axes when you blend the execution of Motion Coordinated Linear Move (MCLM) and Motion Coordinated Circular Move (MCCM) instructions
large message (MSG) instructions might have caused a non-recoverable fault
The following configuration of a Message (MSG) instruction might have produced a non-recoverable fault
When the controller experiences a non-recoverable fault it clears the project from memory
during power up the controller erroneously showed a red IO LED
During power up the controller sometimes showed a flashing red IO LED when there was no problem
autotune produced unnecessary warnings
When you completed an autotune of an Enhanced PID (PIDE) function block instruction the Autotune Status field sometimes showed warning messages that were incorrect (did not apply)
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Termination Type0 = actual tolerance1 = no settle2 = command tolerance3 = no deceleration
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) axes change more smoothly and follow the intended path more closely
If the Termination Type = command tolerance (2) or no deceleration (3) and the program path direction is reversed the instruction will exceed the specified accelerationdeceleration for the MCLM or MCCM instruction
Message type = CIP Data Table Read or Write
The instruction transferred gt 240 bytes
Communication was through the serial port
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 11
Known Anomalies The known anomalies are organized by the catalog number in which they are known to exist
Rampsoak (RMPS) instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode
On download a RampSoak (RMPS) Instruction now initializes to Operator Manual mode unless some other mode is requested
In previous revisions the instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode This lack of initialization could have caused the RMPS instruction to ignore the soak time for the first rampsoak segment
Remote output module momentarily dropped its connection
The following combination of circumstances occasionally caused an output module to drop its connection to the controller and then re-establish the connection
The module was in a remote chassis
The module used a Rack Optimization communication format
The controller also executed a Message (MSG) instruction that bridged across the backplane of that same remote chassis to another communication module
Occurred most frequently if the MSG instruction was not cached
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Table 6 Known Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Using RPI = 1ms with 1769-L20 and 1769-L30 controllers causes a fault on the Virtual Adapter
The RPI range for the CompactLogix Virtual Adapter was changed to allow settings from 1 ms - 750 ms for all CompactLogix controller types Currently the only CompactLogix controllers that support a 1 ms RPI are the 1769-L31 1769-L32E 1769-L35E controllers The 1769-L20 1769-L30 controllers support a 2 ms minimum RPI
You can configure a 1769-L20 1769-L30 controller project for 1 ms RPI since this appears as a valid range for the controller and you can download the project without error but the Virtual Adapter will be faulted The fault indicated on the Virtual Adapter Connection tab is ldquoRequested Packet Interval (RPI) out of rangerdquo The software indicates the setting is valid but the controller rejects the RPI because it is invalid
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
12 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Restrictions The restrictions are organized by the catalog number
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30
Table 7 Restrictions
Restriction DescriptionIn a tag of a user-defined data type an instruction may write past the end of an array
If you write too much data to an array that is within a user-defined data type some instructions write beyond the array and into other members of the tag
The following instructions write beyond the array into other members of the tag
This restriction also applies to all previous revisionsTo prevent writing beyond the limits of the destination array make sure the length operand of the instruction is less than or equal to the number of elements in the array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
hellipthe instruction stops at the end of the array
Example 1 Instruction Stops at the End of the Array
hellipthe instruction writes data beyond the end of the array into other members of the tag Regardless of the length specified for the instruction it stops writing if it reaches the end of the tag
Example 2 Instruction Writes Beyond the Array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
BSL
BSR
COP
CPS
DDT
FBC
FFL
FFU
FLL
GSV
LFL
LFU
SQL
SRT
SSV
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 13
Installing EDS Files If you have RSLinx software version 242 or greater the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an older version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files You need EDS files for
appropriate controller
1769 CompactBus
1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the EDS files that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware
To update the controller firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file 0001000E00410100eds installed
The EDS files are available on the CD for RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software version 13 The files are also available at
httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Loading Controller Firmware
The controller is shipped without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller The firmware for all CompactLogix controllers is available on the website and on the RSLogix 5000 CD To load firmware you can use
ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
AutoFlash that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
See the controller installation instructions for more information about using these utilities to load firmware
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
14 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Additional Memory Requirements
Revision 130 or later may require more memory than previous revisions for example 10x 11x To estimate the additional memory that your project may require use Table 8
Table 8
If you have this firmware revision (add all that apply)
Then add the following memory requirements to your project
Component Increase per instance
12x or earlier IO module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 90 bytes
IO module with a comm format = something other than Rack Optimization that is direct connection
144 bytes
CompactLogix 1769 IO module 170 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = None 160 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 220 bytes
11x or earlier tag that uses the MOTION_INSTRUCTION data type 4 bytes
tag for an axis
If the data type is And the tag is
AXIS_VIRTUAL produced for another controller 264 bytes
not produced for another controller 264 bytes
output cam execution targets 648 bytes
user-defined data type
number of user-defined data types in the controller organizer Data Types folder User-defined folder
not the use of that data type in tags
128 bytes
indirect address (using a tag as the subscript for an array in an instruction for example Array_A[Tag_B]) This memory change applies only if the array
uses a structure as its data type does not use one of these data types CONTROL COUNTER PID
or TIMER
has only one dimension for example UDT_1[5]
(-60 bytes)
10x or earlier programs 12 bytes
routines 16 bytes
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 15
Hold Last State and User-defined Safe State Not Supported
When 1769 Compact IO modules are used as local IO modules in a CompactLogix system the local IO modules do not support the Hold Last State or User-defined Safe State features even though you can configure these options in the programming software
If a local IO module fails such that the modulersquos communication to the controller is lost or if any module is disconnected from the system bus while under power the controller will go into the fault mode All outputs turn off when the system bus or any module faults
RSLogix 5000 software creates tags for modules when you add them to the IO configuration The 1769 module tags define configuration (C) data type members that may include attributes for alternate outputs CompactLogix does not enable local modules to use the alternate outputs Do not configure the attributes listed below
Any 1769 Compact IO modules used as remote IO modules in a CompactLogix system do support the Hold Last State and User-Defined Safe State features
For Digital Output Modules For Analog Output Modules
ProgToFaultEn
ProgMode
ProgValue
FaultMode
FaultValue
CHxProgToFaultEn
CHxProgMode
CHxFaultMode
where CHx = the channel number
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
16 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Verify IO Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used
Each module in a CompactLogix system uses a set amount of backplane memory in addition to the data that the module stores or transfers Some modules require a considerable amount of backplane memory Take this into account when designing your system because backplane memory usage affects how many modules a controller can support Each CompactLogix controller supports 256 16-bit words of backplane data Table 9 shows how many backplane words each module uses
(35 words input34 words output118 words configuration)
1769-SDN 76plus total words in scanlist
system overhead (per controller)
34 34
Total Words Required(1)
(1) The total words required cannot exceed 256 words
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 17
Compact IO CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx and RSLogix 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 11
Known Anomalies The known anomalies are organized by the catalog number in which they are known to exist
Rampsoak (RMPS) instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode
On download a RampSoak (RMPS) Instruction now initializes to Operator Manual mode unless some other mode is requested
In previous revisions the instruction failed to initialize to the correct mode This lack of initialization could have caused the RMPS instruction to ignore the soak time for the first rampsoak segment
Remote output module momentarily dropped its connection
The following combination of circumstances occasionally caused an output module to drop its connection to the controller and then re-establish the connection
The module was in a remote chassis
The module used a Rack Optimization communication format
The controller also executed a Message (MSG) instruction that bridged across the backplane of that same remote chassis to another communication module
Occurred most frequently if the MSG instruction was not cached
Table 5 Corrected Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Table 6 Known Anomalies
Anomaly Description
Using RPI = 1ms with 1769-L20 and 1769-L30 controllers causes a fault on the Virtual Adapter
The RPI range for the CompactLogix Virtual Adapter was changed to allow settings from 1 ms - 750 ms for all CompactLogix controller types Currently the only CompactLogix controllers that support a 1 ms RPI are the 1769-L31 1769-L32E 1769-L35E controllers The 1769-L20 1769-L30 controllers support a 2 ms minimum RPI
You can configure a 1769-L20 1769-L30 controller project for 1 ms RPI since this appears as a valid range for the controller and you can download the project without error but the Virtual Adapter will be faulted The fault indicated on the Virtual Adapter Connection tab is ldquoRequested Packet Interval (RPI) out of rangerdquo The software indicates the setting is valid but the controller rejects the RPI because it is invalid
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
12 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Restrictions The restrictions are organized by the catalog number
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30
Table 7 Restrictions
Restriction DescriptionIn a tag of a user-defined data type an instruction may write past the end of an array
If you write too much data to an array that is within a user-defined data type some instructions write beyond the array and into other members of the tag
The following instructions write beyond the array into other members of the tag
This restriction also applies to all previous revisionsTo prevent writing beyond the limits of the destination array make sure the length operand of the instruction is less than or equal to the number of elements in the array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
hellipthe instruction stops at the end of the array
Example 1 Instruction Stops at the End of the Array
hellipthe instruction writes data beyond the end of the array into other members of the tag Regardless of the length specified for the instruction it stops writing if it reaches the end of the tag
Example 2 Instruction Writes Beyond the Array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
BSL
BSR
COP
CPS
DDT
FBC
FFL
FFU
FLL
GSV
LFL
LFU
SQL
SRT
SSV
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 13
Installing EDS Files If you have RSLinx software version 242 or greater the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an older version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files You need EDS files for
appropriate controller
1769 CompactBus
1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the EDS files that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware
To update the controller firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file 0001000E00410100eds installed
The EDS files are available on the CD for RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software version 13 The files are also available at
httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Loading Controller Firmware
The controller is shipped without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller The firmware for all CompactLogix controllers is available on the website and on the RSLogix 5000 CD To load firmware you can use
ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
AutoFlash that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
See the controller installation instructions for more information about using these utilities to load firmware
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
14 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Additional Memory Requirements
Revision 130 or later may require more memory than previous revisions for example 10x 11x To estimate the additional memory that your project may require use Table 8
Table 8
If you have this firmware revision (add all that apply)
Then add the following memory requirements to your project
Component Increase per instance
12x or earlier IO module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 90 bytes
IO module with a comm format = something other than Rack Optimization that is direct connection
144 bytes
CompactLogix 1769 IO module 170 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = None 160 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 220 bytes
11x or earlier tag that uses the MOTION_INSTRUCTION data type 4 bytes
tag for an axis
If the data type is And the tag is
AXIS_VIRTUAL produced for another controller 264 bytes
not produced for another controller 264 bytes
output cam execution targets 648 bytes
user-defined data type
number of user-defined data types in the controller organizer Data Types folder User-defined folder
not the use of that data type in tags
128 bytes
indirect address (using a tag as the subscript for an array in an instruction for example Array_A[Tag_B]) This memory change applies only if the array
uses a structure as its data type does not use one of these data types CONTROL COUNTER PID
or TIMER
has only one dimension for example UDT_1[5]
(-60 bytes)
10x or earlier programs 12 bytes
routines 16 bytes
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 15
Hold Last State and User-defined Safe State Not Supported
When 1769 Compact IO modules are used as local IO modules in a CompactLogix system the local IO modules do not support the Hold Last State or User-defined Safe State features even though you can configure these options in the programming software
If a local IO module fails such that the modulersquos communication to the controller is lost or if any module is disconnected from the system bus while under power the controller will go into the fault mode All outputs turn off when the system bus or any module faults
RSLogix 5000 software creates tags for modules when you add them to the IO configuration The 1769 module tags define configuration (C) data type members that may include attributes for alternate outputs CompactLogix does not enable local modules to use the alternate outputs Do not configure the attributes listed below
Any 1769 Compact IO modules used as remote IO modules in a CompactLogix system do support the Hold Last State and User-Defined Safe State features
For Digital Output Modules For Analog Output Modules
ProgToFaultEn
ProgMode
ProgValue
FaultMode
FaultValue
CHxProgToFaultEn
CHxProgMode
CHxFaultMode
where CHx = the channel number
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
16 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Verify IO Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used
Each module in a CompactLogix system uses a set amount of backplane memory in addition to the data that the module stores or transfers Some modules require a considerable amount of backplane memory Take this into account when designing your system because backplane memory usage affects how many modules a controller can support Each CompactLogix controller supports 256 16-bit words of backplane data Table 9 shows how many backplane words each module uses
(35 words input34 words output118 words configuration)
1769-SDN 76plus total words in scanlist
system overhead (per controller)
34 34
Total Words Required(1)
(1) The total words required cannot exceed 256 words
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 17
Compact IO CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx and RSLogix 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
12 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Restrictions The restrictions are organized by the catalog number
CompactLogix 1769-L20 1769-L30
Table 7 Restrictions
Restriction DescriptionIn a tag of a user-defined data type an instruction may write past the end of an array
If you write too much data to an array that is within a user-defined data type some instructions write beyond the array and into other members of the tag
The following instructions write beyond the array into other members of the tag
This restriction also applies to all previous revisionsTo prevent writing beyond the limits of the destination array make sure the length operand of the instruction is less than or equal to the number of elements in the array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
hellipthe instruction stops at the end of the array
Example 1 Instruction Stops at the End of the Array
hellipthe instruction writes data beyond the end of the array into other members of the tag Regardless of the length specified for the instruction it stops writing if it reaches the end of the tag
Example 2 Instruction Writes Beyond the Array
If the length is greater than the number of elements in the destination arrayhellip
BSL
BSR
COP
CPS
DDT
FBC
FFL
FFU
FLL
GSV
LFL
LFU
SQL
SRT
SSV
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 13
Installing EDS Files If you have RSLinx software version 242 or greater the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an older version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files You need EDS files for
appropriate controller
1769 CompactBus
1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the EDS files that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware
To update the controller firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file 0001000E00410100eds installed
The EDS files are available on the CD for RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software version 13 The files are also available at
httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Loading Controller Firmware
The controller is shipped without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller The firmware for all CompactLogix controllers is available on the website and on the RSLogix 5000 CD To load firmware you can use
ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
AutoFlash that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
See the controller installation instructions for more information about using these utilities to load firmware
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
14 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Additional Memory Requirements
Revision 130 or later may require more memory than previous revisions for example 10x 11x To estimate the additional memory that your project may require use Table 8
Table 8
If you have this firmware revision (add all that apply)
Then add the following memory requirements to your project
Component Increase per instance
12x or earlier IO module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 90 bytes
IO module with a comm format = something other than Rack Optimization that is direct connection
144 bytes
CompactLogix 1769 IO module 170 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = None 160 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 220 bytes
11x or earlier tag that uses the MOTION_INSTRUCTION data type 4 bytes
tag for an axis
If the data type is And the tag is
AXIS_VIRTUAL produced for another controller 264 bytes
not produced for another controller 264 bytes
output cam execution targets 648 bytes
user-defined data type
number of user-defined data types in the controller organizer Data Types folder User-defined folder
not the use of that data type in tags
128 bytes
indirect address (using a tag as the subscript for an array in an instruction for example Array_A[Tag_B]) This memory change applies only if the array
uses a structure as its data type does not use one of these data types CONTROL COUNTER PID
or TIMER
has only one dimension for example UDT_1[5]
(-60 bytes)
10x or earlier programs 12 bytes
routines 16 bytes
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 15
Hold Last State and User-defined Safe State Not Supported
When 1769 Compact IO modules are used as local IO modules in a CompactLogix system the local IO modules do not support the Hold Last State or User-defined Safe State features even though you can configure these options in the programming software
If a local IO module fails such that the modulersquos communication to the controller is lost or if any module is disconnected from the system bus while under power the controller will go into the fault mode All outputs turn off when the system bus or any module faults
RSLogix 5000 software creates tags for modules when you add them to the IO configuration The 1769 module tags define configuration (C) data type members that may include attributes for alternate outputs CompactLogix does not enable local modules to use the alternate outputs Do not configure the attributes listed below
Any 1769 Compact IO modules used as remote IO modules in a CompactLogix system do support the Hold Last State and User-Defined Safe State features
For Digital Output Modules For Analog Output Modules
ProgToFaultEn
ProgMode
ProgValue
FaultMode
FaultValue
CHxProgToFaultEn
CHxProgMode
CHxFaultMode
where CHx = the channel number
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
16 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Verify IO Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used
Each module in a CompactLogix system uses a set amount of backplane memory in addition to the data that the module stores or transfers Some modules require a considerable amount of backplane memory Take this into account when designing your system because backplane memory usage affects how many modules a controller can support Each CompactLogix controller supports 256 16-bit words of backplane data Table 9 shows how many backplane words each module uses
(35 words input34 words output118 words configuration)
1769-SDN 76plus total words in scanlist
system overhead (per controller)
34 34
Total Words Required(1)
(1) The total words required cannot exceed 256 words
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 17
Compact IO CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx and RSLogix 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 13
Installing EDS Files If you have RSLinx software version 242 or greater the most current EDS files were installed with the software If you are using an older version of RSLinx software you might need to install EDS files You need EDS files for
appropriate controller
1769 CompactBus
1769 local adapter
All of these EDS files except for the 1769 CompactBus file are updated for each firmware revision There is also a revision 1 of the EDS files that you need for new controllers Each controller ships with revision 1 firmware
To update the controller firmware you must have the revision 1 EDS file 0001000E00410100eds installed
The EDS files are available on the CD for RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series software version 13 The files are also available at
httpwwwabcomnetworkseds
Loading Controller Firmware
The controller is shipped without working firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the controller The firmware for all CompactLogix controllers is available on the website and on the RSLogix 5000 CD To load firmware you can use
ControlFlash utility that ships with RSLogix 5000 programming software
AutoFlash that launches through RSLogix 5000 software when you try to open or create a project and the controller does not have the current firmware
See the controller installation instructions for more information about using these utilities to load firmware
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
14 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Additional Memory Requirements
Revision 130 or later may require more memory than previous revisions for example 10x 11x To estimate the additional memory that your project may require use Table 8
Table 8
If you have this firmware revision (add all that apply)
Then add the following memory requirements to your project
Component Increase per instance
12x or earlier IO module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 90 bytes
IO module with a comm format = something other than Rack Optimization that is direct connection
144 bytes
CompactLogix 1769 IO module 170 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = None 160 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 220 bytes
11x or earlier tag that uses the MOTION_INSTRUCTION data type 4 bytes
tag for an axis
If the data type is And the tag is
AXIS_VIRTUAL produced for another controller 264 bytes
not produced for another controller 264 bytes
output cam execution targets 648 bytes
user-defined data type
number of user-defined data types in the controller organizer Data Types folder User-defined folder
not the use of that data type in tags
128 bytes
indirect address (using a tag as the subscript for an array in an instruction for example Array_A[Tag_B]) This memory change applies only if the array
uses a structure as its data type does not use one of these data types CONTROL COUNTER PID
or TIMER
has only one dimension for example UDT_1[5]
(-60 bytes)
10x or earlier programs 12 bytes
routines 16 bytes
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 15
Hold Last State and User-defined Safe State Not Supported
When 1769 Compact IO modules are used as local IO modules in a CompactLogix system the local IO modules do not support the Hold Last State or User-defined Safe State features even though you can configure these options in the programming software
If a local IO module fails such that the modulersquos communication to the controller is lost or if any module is disconnected from the system bus while under power the controller will go into the fault mode All outputs turn off when the system bus or any module faults
RSLogix 5000 software creates tags for modules when you add them to the IO configuration The 1769 module tags define configuration (C) data type members that may include attributes for alternate outputs CompactLogix does not enable local modules to use the alternate outputs Do not configure the attributes listed below
Any 1769 Compact IO modules used as remote IO modules in a CompactLogix system do support the Hold Last State and User-Defined Safe State features
For Digital Output Modules For Analog Output Modules
ProgToFaultEn
ProgMode
ProgValue
FaultMode
FaultValue
CHxProgToFaultEn
CHxProgMode
CHxFaultMode
where CHx = the channel number
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
16 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Verify IO Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used
Each module in a CompactLogix system uses a set amount of backplane memory in addition to the data that the module stores or transfers Some modules require a considerable amount of backplane memory Take this into account when designing your system because backplane memory usage affects how many modules a controller can support Each CompactLogix controller supports 256 16-bit words of backplane data Table 9 shows how many backplane words each module uses
(35 words input34 words output118 words configuration)
1769-SDN 76plus total words in scanlist
system overhead (per controller)
34 34
Total Words Required(1)
(1) The total words required cannot exceed 256 words
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 17
Compact IO CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx and RSLogix 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
14 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Additional Memory Requirements
Revision 130 or later may require more memory than previous revisions for example 10x 11x To estimate the additional memory that your project may require use Table 8
Table 8
If you have this firmware revision (add all that apply)
Then add the following memory requirements to your project
Component Increase per instance
12x or earlier IO module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 90 bytes
IO module with a comm format = something other than Rack Optimization that is direct connection
144 bytes
CompactLogix 1769 IO module 170 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = None 160 bytes
bridge module with a comm format = Rack Optimization 220 bytes
11x or earlier tag that uses the MOTION_INSTRUCTION data type 4 bytes
tag for an axis
If the data type is And the tag is
AXIS_VIRTUAL produced for another controller 264 bytes
not produced for another controller 264 bytes
output cam execution targets 648 bytes
user-defined data type
number of user-defined data types in the controller organizer Data Types folder User-defined folder
not the use of that data type in tags
128 bytes
indirect address (using a tag as the subscript for an array in an instruction for example Array_A[Tag_B]) This memory change applies only if the array
uses a structure as its data type does not use one of these data types CONTROL COUNTER PID
or TIMER
has only one dimension for example UDT_1[5]
(-60 bytes)
10x or earlier programs 12 bytes
routines 16 bytes
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 15
Hold Last State and User-defined Safe State Not Supported
When 1769 Compact IO modules are used as local IO modules in a CompactLogix system the local IO modules do not support the Hold Last State or User-defined Safe State features even though you can configure these options in the programming software
If a local IO module fails such that the modulersquos communication to the controller is lost or if any module is disconnected from the system bus while under power the controller will go into the fault mode All outputs turn off when the system bus or any module faults
RSLogix 5000 software creates tags for modules when you add them to the IO configuration The 1769 module tags define configuration (C) data type members that may include attributes for alternate outputs CompactLogix does not enable local modules to use the alternate outputs Do not configure the attributes listed below
Any 1769 Compact IO modules used as remote IO modules in a CompactLogix system do support the Hold Last State and User-Defined Safe State features
For Digital Output Modules For Analog Output Modules
ProgToFaultEn
ProgMode
ProgValue
FaultMode
FaultValue
CHxProgToFaultEn
CHxProgMode
CHxFaultMode
where CHx = the channel number
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
16 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Verify IO Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used
Each module in a CompactLogix system uses a set amount of backplane memory in addition to the data that the module stores or transfers Some modules require a considerable amount of backplane memory Take this into account when designing your system because backplane memory usage affects how many modules a controller can support Each CompactLogix controller supports 256 16-bit words of backplane data Table 9 shows how many backplane words each module uses
(35 words input34 words output118 words configuration)
1769-SDN 76plus total words in scanlist
system overhead (per controller)
34 34
Total Words Required(1)
(1) The total words required cannot exceed 256 words
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 17
Compact IO CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx and RSLogix 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 15
Hold Last State and User-defined Safe State Not Supported
When 1769 Compact IO modules are used as local IO modules in a CompactLogix system the local IO modules do not support the Hold Last State or User-defined Safe State features even though you can configure these options in the programming software
If a local IO module fails such that the modulersquos communication to the controller is lost or if any module is disconnected from the system bus while under power the controller will go into the fault mode All outputs turn off when the system bus or any module faults
RSLogix 5000 software creates tags for modules when you add them to the IO configuration The 1769 module tags define configuration (C) data type members that may include attributes for alternate outputs CompactLogix does not enable local modules to use the alternate outputs Do not configure the attributes listed below
Any 1769 Compact IO modules used as remote IO modules in a CompactLogix system do support the Hold Last State and User-Defined Safe State features
For Digital Output Modules For Analog Output Modules
ProgToFaultEn
ProgMode
ProgValue
FaultMode
FaultValue
CHxProgToFaultEn
CHxProgMode
CHxFaultMode
where CHx = the channel number
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
16 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Verify IO Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used
Each module in a CompactLogix system uses a set amount of backplane memory in addition to the data that the module stores or transfers Some modules require a considerable amount of backplane memory Take this into account when designing your system because backplane memory usage affects how many modules a controller can support Each CompactLogix controller supports 256 16-bit words of backplane data Table 9 shows how many backplane words each module uses
(35 words input34 words output118 words configuration)
1769-SDN 76plus total words in scanlist
system overhead (per controller)
34 34
Total Words Required(1)
(1) The total words required cannot exceed 256 words
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 17
Compact IO CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx and RSLogix 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
16 CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13
Verify IO Layout by Adding Words of Backplane Memory Used
Each module in a CompactLogix system uses a set amount of backplane memory in addition to the data that the module stores or transfers Some modules require a considerable amount of backplane memory Take this into account when designing your system because backplane memory usage affects how many modules a controller can support Each CompactLogix controller supports 256 16-bit words of backplane data Table 9 shows how many backplane words each module uses
(35 words input34 words output118 words configuration)
1769-SDN 76plus total words in scanlist
system overhead (per controller)
34 34
Total Words Required(1)
(1) The total words required cannot exceed 256 words
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 17
Compact IO CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx and RSLogix 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005
CompactLogix L20 and L30 Controllers Revision 13 17
Compact IO CompactLogix Logix5000 RSLinx and RSLogix 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
RA-QR005C-EN-E 608
Publication 1769-RN009B-EN-E - October 2005 18 PN 957988-53Supersedes Publication 1769-RN009A-EN-E - October 2004 Copyright copy 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the USA
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using its products At httpsupportrockwellautomationcom you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information thats contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned
United States 14406463223Monday ndash Friday 8am ndash 5pm EST
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical support issues
United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return process
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet
Generic pub print specs
Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus
IN RN pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
UM RM PM pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
AP PP pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
BR pub type specs
Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields
Field definitions
Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user
Attach Print Specs to PDF
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
Corp
17501
Bill To
69
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
IN RN pub type specs
UM RM PM pub type specs
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
1769-RN009B-EN-E
CompactLogix L20 and L30 ControllersRevision 13
EA
1
1
Marketing Commercial
19021
10272005
5
Black amp White
B
STAPLED1
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
18
9
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
BLACK (preferred)
85
11
CORNER
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
50
RRD must provide this information
Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black
PN 957988-53
UM RM PM pub type specs
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
EA
1
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Black amp White
B
PERFECT
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
2
PLAIN
20
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
516
3LEFT
NA
NA
NA
NA
RRD must provide this information
Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = BlackSpine = If included as last page of PDF
AP PP pub type specs
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Item Description
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
NA
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
GLOSS TEXT
80
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
RRD must provide this information
BR pub type specs
Field definitions
ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool
100 Gloss Text
100 Text
10pt C1S Cover
10pt C2S Cover
10pt C2S Text
10pt Text Stock
110 White Index
12pt C1S Cover
20 White Opaque Bond
50 Colored Offset
50 White Offset
50 White Opaque
60 Cover Stock
60 White Offset
80 Gloss Cover
80 Gloss Text
8pt C1S White
90 White Index
CoverText Ink
Black
Black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
Black + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color
4 color over black
4 color + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color over black + 1 PMS color
Type in PMS color
4 color + 2 PMS colors
Type in PMS colors
4 color + aqueous
4 color + varnish
dPrint
ContentComp
Split Shipment Indicator Flag
WCSS Item Number
Customer Item Number
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Producing Plant
Job Number
Replenishing Plant
Plant Code
Product Code
PackagingOrdering UOM
Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM
List Price Per Ea
Transfer Cost per Ea
Sell Price per Ea
Standard Cost (per Ea)
Min Order Qty (in eaches)
Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches
Chargeback Price
Item Reference 1
Item Reference 2
Revision Field
Max Order Qty (in eaches)
Sequentially Numbered Item
Sequentially Numbered Item - Details
Priced for Digital or Offset
Content File Location
Item Category Form (F) Book (B)
Item Subtype
Orientation
Sides Printed
CSSJLS Stock Componet
Paper Size Width
Paper Size Length
No of Forms to a Sheet
Page Qty
Sheets Qty
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
of Tabs
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency (clearview or matt)
Thermal Tape Color
Trim Size Width
Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drilling Size
Drilling Location
Glue Location
Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Poly
Box
Comments
Cross Reference Item Number 1
Publication Number
Publication Title
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure
Min Order Qty
Multiple Order Qty
Business Group
Cost Center
Revision Date
Max Order Qty
Black amp Whiteor Color
Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B)
BindingStitching
Orientation
Sides Printed
Printing Paper Size Width
Printing Paper Size Length
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Page Count of Publication
Number of Sheets Required to Print
CSSJLS Production Stock
Paper Stock Type
Paper Stock Weight
Paper Stock Color
Stack Offset
Tab Size
Number of Tabs Needed
Binder Size
Binder Color
Binder Ring Type
Binder Transparency
Thermal Tape Color
Finished Trim Size Width
Finished Trim Size Length
Stitching Location
Drill Hole Size
Number and Location of Drill Holes
Glue Location
Number of Pages per Pad
Fold Type
Fold At
Number of Pieces per Poly wrap
Number of Pieces per Box
Comments
Part Number
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup
The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8
Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items
Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number
30 characters maximum
Cannot use quote symbol that is----
Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item
Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su
Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant
Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below)
Required Enter one of the applicable product
Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes)
Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure
Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet
Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM
Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA
Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM)
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record
IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item
Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers
Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field
Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed
IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item
Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required
The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu
If item uses tabs otherwise NA
If needed otherwise type NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If item used in a binder otherwise NA
If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length
If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA
Click here for a list of possible drill locations
If publication uses padding otherwise NA
If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional
The location(s) of the fold
Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu
Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values
List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank
PK
1
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group
Color
B
SADDLE
PORTRAIT
HEAD2HEAD
RRD must provide this information
RRD must provide this information
White
RRD must provide this information
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
85
11
SIDE
NA
NA
NA
NA
HALF
85 x 11
50
RRD must provide this information
Field definitions
ampL04032006ampRampP
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure
EA = Each
PK = Pack
PD = Pad
RL = Roll
BK = Book
CT = Carton
BX = Box
ST = Set
Multiple Order Qty
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn)
Business Group
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center
CorporateBusiness Development
Finance
Human Resources
IT
Logistics
Manufacturing
Marketing Commercial
Marketing Europe
Marketing Other
Operations
Order Services
Other
Process Improvement
Procurement
Quality
Sales
Max Order Quantity
Presale items = 100
Postsale items = 5
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B)
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages
BindingStitching
For a Form (F) use
CARBONLESS
CUTSHEET
ENVELOPE
For a Book (B) use
LOOSE
LOOSE -Loose Leaf
PERFECT
PERFECT - Perfect Bound
PLASTCOIL
PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil (Coil Bound)
SADDLE
SADDLE - Saddle Stitch
STAPLED1
STAPLED1 -1 position
STAPLED1B
STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position
STAPLED2
STAPLED2 - 2 positions
THERMAL
THERMAL - Thermal bound (Tape bound)
THERMALO
THERMALO - Thermal Bound (Tape bound - offline)
WIRE O
Wire O - Double Wire Bound (offline)
Saddle-Stitch Items
20 sheets max on 20 (text and cover)
19 sheets max on 20 (text) and 24 (cover)
18 sheets max on 24 (text and cover)
All page quantities must be divisible by 4
Tape Bound Items
125 sheets max on 20 no cover
120 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Perfect Bound Items
475 sheets max on 20 no cover
470 sheets max wcover (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Double Wire Bound Items
40 sheets max on 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Coil Bound Items
290 sheets max of 20 (if adding cover deduct equivalent number of pages to equal cover thickness) (90 index unless indicated otherwise)
Sides Printed
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page
Simplex = Single-sided printing
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page
Number of Forms to a Sheet
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4
Number of Sheets Required to Print
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of one 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 1
Paper Stock Type
Description
PLAIN
Bond
ACNTCVR
Accent Cover
BOND3H
Bond (3-hole)
BOOKENV
Booklet Envelope
C1SGLOSS
C1S Gloss Finish
C1SMATTE
C1S Matt Finish
C2SGLOSS
C2S Gloss Finish
C2SMATTE
C2S Matt Finish
CARD
Card Stock
CATLGENV
Catalog Envelope
CATLGENV6
6 Catalog Envelope
COVERCOLOR
Color Cover Copy
CRCKPEEL
Crack N Peel Label
CUSTOM
Custom
CVRFUTURA
Futura Cover
ENV6x9
Standard 6X9 Envelope
ENV9X12
Standard 9X12 Envelope
ETHCERT
Ethicon Certificate
GLOSSCOVER
Gloss Cover
GLOSSTEXT
Gloss Text
HOTSTEXT
Hots Text
INDEX
Index
LABEL80
80 Up Label
MICROPRT
Micro Print
OFFSET
Offset
PART2
2 Part
PART3
3 Part
PART4
4 Part
PART5
5 Part
PART6
6 Part
PERF
12 inch Perfed
PERMMAT
Perm Mat Ad
PRECUTTAB
Pre-Cut Tab
PREPERF
Pre-Perforated
RECYL
Recycled
SE10ENV
10 Standard Envelope
SE10ITENV
10 Inside Tint Envelope
SE9ENV
9 Stanard Envelope
TAG
Tag
TEXT
Text
TEXTCOLOR
Text Color Copy
TEXTFUTURA
Futura Text
TEXTLASER
Text Laser Print
TRANSPRNCY
Transparencies
VELLUM
Vellum
VELLUM3HP
Vellum 3HP
WE10ENV
10 Window Envelope
WE9ENV
9 Windor Envelope
WE9ITENV
9 Inside Tint Window Envelope
Paper Stock Color
Black
Blue
Buff
Canary
Cherry
Clear
Cream
Custom
Goldrenrod
Gray
Green
Ivory
Lavender
Manilla
NCRPinkCanary
NCRWhiteBlue
NCRWhiteBlueCanary
NCRWhiteCanary
NCRWhiteCanaryPink
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod
NCRWhiteGreen
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow
NCRWhitePink
NCRWhiteWhite
Opaque
Orange
Orchid
Peach
Pink
Purple
Salmon
Tan
Violet
White
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length)
11 x 17
18 x 24 Poster
24 x 36 Poster
3 x 5
36 x 24 Poster
4 x 6
475 x 7
475 x 775
55 x 85
6 x 4
7 x 9
7385 x 9 (RSI Std)
85 x 11
825 x 10875
825 x 11 (RA product profile std)
8375 x 10875
9 x 12
A4
A5
Other - Custom size listed below
Drilling Locations
1CENTER
1LEFTTOP
1TOPCENTER
2LEFT
2LEFT2TOP
2TOP
2TOP2LEFT
2TOP3LEFT
2TOP5LEFT
2TOP5RIGHT
3BOTTOM
3LEFT
3LEFT2TOP
3LEFT3TOP
3RIGHT
3TOP
3TOP5LEFT
5BOTTOM
5CENTER
5LEFT
5RIGHT
5RIGHT2TOP
5TOP
For TRI fold - select Z or C type
Description
HALF
Half
C
C Fold
DBLEPARLL
Double Parallel
OFFSETZ
Offset Z
SAMPLE
See Sample
SHORT
Short Fold
V
V Fold
Z
Z Fold
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap
Publication length
Number per Poly Wrap
77 or more pages
1
33 to 76 pages
25
3 to 32 pages
50
1 or 2 pages
100
Comments
CoverText Stock
Spine
100 Gloss Cover
If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Do NOT include that page as part of the publication page count Because the addition of a spine will create an odd page count in the PDF contact a Super User to submit your publication via PDFdirect with an exception tool